Home

IP Office Basic Edition

1. NI2 w Zero Suppression BZS v Local Telco w Send Redirecting Number CSU Operation L Network Line Signalling CPE v ESF HaulLength 0 115 ft v Channel Unit Foreign Exchange W Result N ON 1N N IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 99 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Trunk Parameters e Switch Type Default NI2 Options 4ESS 5ESS DMS100 and NI2 e Provider Default Local Telco Select the PSTN service provider AT amp T Sprint WorldCom or Local Telco When set to AT amp T an additional AT amp T Provider Setup 102 menu can be accessed from the menu e Test Number Used to remember the external telephone number of this line to assist with loop back testing For information only e Send Redirecting Number Default Off e Clock Quality Defau t Network Leave as Network unless advised otherwise by Avaya e Framing Default ESF Selects the type of signal framing used ESF or D4 e CRC Checking Default On Turns CRC on or off e Zero Suppression Default B8ZS Selects the method of zero suppression used B8ZS or AMI ZCS e CSU Operation Tick this field to enable the T1 line to respond to loop back requests from the line e Line Signaling Default CPE The field can be set to either CPE Customer Premises Equipment or CO Central Office This field should normally be left a
2. Ye s Coverage Destination Ye Ye UniquetineRinging w Ye IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 203 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin WMSDelay Day es ovs VMS Detay Night w ve wusscedde ws ve SSS T ves ves bens ves s Authentication Name vs ve D DisplayName e ve Pass c vs Registration Required vs ve Rest e ve O ves IncludeinDialPlan DID Mapping Table Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin DID Number p ve wee o oe DD g De mto ve e IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 204 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools Analog Trunk Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Analog Trunk Appearance ID Yes Yes Setup Hold Disconnect Time Yes Yes lt Coverage Destination Yes es lt Yes es Ring Pattern lt Yes es Delay Day Delay Night Trunk Type Yes es lt Yes es lt Auto Attendant Yes es Detailed Trunk Ring Persistency Parameters lt Yes es 1 Ring Off Maximum Yes Yes
3. Equipment Description Door Phone If a handset has been configured as being a door phone you can specify which extension is alerted when that door phone is used Two door phones can be configured into the system See Door Phone 12 for further detail Contact Closure The phone system has two ports which can be connected to external relay systems for example systems used to open doors You can configure which users are able to activate those ports and the type of activation See Contact Closure 13 for further detail The phone system supports an external music on hold source This is played to callers when they are put on hold The source of the music is connected to the phone system by the system maintainer The phone system can log call details at the end of each call These SMDR records 18 Station Message Detail Recording can be output and sent to a specified IP address where they can be collected and processed by 3rd party call logging software IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 127 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 6 1 Door Phone This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Setup Auxiliary Equipments This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 43 list by selecting Auxiliary Equipment If a handset has been configured as being a door phone you can specify which extension is alerted when that door phone is used Two door phones can
4. and can be up to 28 digits long You can also use the character as a single digit wildcard System List Management Allowed Lists Allowed List Number 1 v Disallowed Lists Telephone Numbers in list Emergency Number Lists 28 Digit Number Account Code Entries 06 02 07 03 0g 04 09 05 10 Valid digits are 0 9 and Wildcard Assign Users to list Available Users Selected Users 10 Add 11 12 Add All gt gt 13 L3 14 15 Remove 15 17 lt lt Remove All 18 4 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 53 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 2 1 2 Disallowed Lists This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Create Calling Lists Disallowed Lists This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting System List Management Each disallowed list contains external telephone numbers that users who are members of the list are not allowed to dial Numbers in the disallowed lists of which a user is a member are overridden if they also appear in the allowed numbers lists emergency number list of which the user is a member and also by marked system speed dials 57 There are eight lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits 0 to 9 and can be up to 28 digits
5. Pickup Groups 1 Pickup Groups 2 Pickup Groups 3 Add gt Ki IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 61 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configure User List This list shows the current settings of all the extension users The list is scrollable and sortable The current group and list settings are show in the list and for the currently selected user can be edited in the Membership Assignment table below the list Extension Information field not editable This is the extension number of the user Name Default Blank Use this field to enter the extension user s full name The recommended format is first name space last name When set the Name is used for display by phones and within these menus otherwise ExtnXXX is shown Only alphanumeric characters and spaces are supported in this field Do not use punctuation characters such as 2 7 gt and The entry in this field should not start with a space or number Language The language entered here will affect the language of prompts displayed on the user s extension and the prompts played to the user when they access their voicemail mailbox e The options are Arabic Brazilian Portuguese Canadian French Cantonese Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Korean Mandarin Norwegian Portuguese Russian Spanish Spanish Argentinean Spanish Latin Spanish Mexican Swed
6. The phone systems music on hold source can also be used for callers being transferred instead of using ringing tone This depends on the Ring on Transfer 138 setting Auxiliary Equipment Music On Hold Setup Door Phone 1 Door Phone 2 Status Contact Closure Group 1 Contact Closure Group 2 Music On Hold SMDR e Status Default Active If active the phone system will use the external music source connected to the phone system If not selected the phone system provides a double beep tone repeated every 5 seconds IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 129 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 6 3 SMDR This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Setup Auxiliary Equipments This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 43 list by selecting Auxiliary Equipment The phone system can log call details at the end of each call These SMDR records 18 Station Message Detail Recording can be output and sent to a specified IP address where they can be collected and processed by 3rd party call logging software Auxiliary Equipment SMDR Setup Door Phone 1 Door Phone 2 SMDR output Contact Closure Group 1 IP Address 192 168 42 203 Lontact osure taroup lt Contact Closure Group 2 TCP Port i Music On Hold Record to buffer 500 v SMDR Call splitting for Diverts e SMDR output Default Off This control
7. List Membership es S lt oO es S lt oO Display Extension Port Location es S lt oO User Advanced es S Parameters lt oO Abbreviated Ringing es S lt oO es S lt oO Call Waiting Extension es S Automatic VMS Cover Transfer Return Extension lt D es S es S lt D es S lt oO Intercom Dial Tone es S lt oO Distinctive Ringing es S lt oO Hotline Alert Number es S lt oO es S lt oO Override Line Ringing es S lt oO User Voicemail Clear Voicemail Code es S Settings lt oO Set Voicemail Code es S lt D Voicemail Email Address es S lt oO es S lt oO Voicemail Email Mode es S lt D Equipment Type es S es lt oO es S es Yes Yes Yes Group Membership Ring Pattern Call Coverage Ring VMS Cover Rings Privacy Enabled DTMF Breakout Loudspeaker Paging Door Phone 1 Door Phone 2 Standard Yes es Yes Speed isis reswmaSpedDs S o Y IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 199 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Button Programming Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Button Yes Yes Yes Programming lt lt lt uU es es lt es es lt es lt es lt es lt lt Uu Button Features es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu i Outs
8. M 04 og 05 10 Valid digits are 0 9 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 55 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 2 1 4 Account Code Entries This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Create Calling Lists Account Code Entries This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting System List Management Account codes are commonly used to control cost allocation and out going call restriction The account code used on a call is included in the call information output by the system call log Users can enter an account code during a call using an Account Code Entry 64 button Once a user has entered an account code with a call only that user can change that calls account code by entering another one Once a call has been completed using an account code the account code information is removed from the user s call information This means that redial functions will not re enter the account code Extensions can be required to enter a valid account code when they make an outgoing external call The Account Code Entries list contains the account codes that are accepted as being valid and the selected users who are required to enter one of these codes ie the users who are set to Forced Account Code Entry All users except analog phones can also enter voluntary account codes at any time during a call by using an Account Co
9. This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 425 list by selecting Trunks BRI trunks are not available in North American locales e ETSI PRI BRI Trunks In PBX System mode all incoming call routing is done using the trunk s DID Mapping Table The table includes a default non editable entry that routes any calls for which there is no other match to the Operator Group Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Card Module Number of Channels Analogue Trunk Analogue Trunk Analogue Trunk Advanced Setup BRI Trunk Channel Setup Channel Appearance ID Local Number Anonymous Coverage Destination Unique Line Ringing Line 1 Channel 2 None Pattern 1 Line 2 Channel 1 07 None Pattern 1 F Line 2 Channel 2 n8 None Pattern 1 DID Mapping T able DID Number Incoming CLI Destination BRI Trunk in Key Mode System e Installed Trunks This table displays information about the trunk cards installed in the phone system Selecting a trunk in the list displays its trunk settings below the list e Line Number Information only not editable e Line Type Not Editable This value indicates the type of trunk The menu fields and sub menus will vary depending on the Line Type e Line Subtype This option is fixed to ETSI for BRI trunks e Card Module Indicates the card slot or expansion module being used for the trunk device pr
10. extension providing coverage When on calls to the user that ring unanswered for the user s number of coverage rings then also start ringing at the call coverage extensions all caller IDs of calls received by the system To use the button the user must be Caller ID Log 156 A button set to this function allows the user to view the phone system s call log of Yes one of the three extensions configured for call ID logging Call Forwarding 14 A button set to this function allows the user to redirect all their calls to another number Extensions with Remote Call Forwarding enabled can also forward calls externally by specifying a personal speed dial as the destination Call Pickup 15 A button set to this function allows the user to pickup a call alerting at a specified E extension Separate buttons can be created for each extension for which call pickup is required Caller ID Inspect 155 A button set to this function allows the user to see the caller ID of a call on Yes another line without interrupting the current call to which they are connected Caller ID Name Display A button set to this function allows the user to swap the display of caller ID name Yes 150 and number information on their extension Calling Group A button set to this function allows the user to call or page the calling group represented by the button Call Screening This function is used to enable or disable call screening While enabled when a caller is pre
11. 23 1 10 SIP Trunks cereo iride eerte ine 23 2 The Manager Application 2 1 Installing Manager ee 29 2 2 Starting Manager sseeee 31 2 3 Setting the Discovery Addresses ssss 33 2 4 Known IP Office Discovery eene 35 2 5 Saving the Configuration sssssssssss 37 2 6 Saving a Configuration to a PC File 39 2 7 Loading a PC File 39 2 8 Simplified View e e 40 2 9 Advanced View sies eterni des 41 2 10 The System Page seem 42 2 11 The Admin Tasks List 43 2 12 Creating a Configuration File sssss 44 3 Configuration Settings 3 1 Remote Administrator Password 47 3 2 System Settings sssssseeeee 48 3 2 1 List Management sss 52 3 2 2 Speed Dial Setup esse 57 3 2 3 License Management sees 59 3 9 User Setup sei itep te tew te eevtnedezenen aie 61 3 3 1 Button Programming eeeeees 63 3 3 2 Advanced Settings sss 72 3 3 3 DND Exception List 76 3 4 Group Management sse 77 3 5 TfUhs ataingia a eels 80 3 5 1 Analog Trunks eee 81 3 5 2 BRI TrUnk uni ett ptt rere ettet e 87 3 5 9 PRI Tr nks eiie iaiia 91 3 5 4 SIP
12. Breakout DTMF 0 Confirm Voicemail Code O Breakout DTMF 2 Voicemail Email Breakout DTMF 3 Voicemail Email 9 of Copy O Forward O Alert Equipment Type Loudspeaker Paging DoorPhone1 DoorPhone2 Fax Machine Extension Standard Phantom Restrictions Forced Account Code Entry Outgoing Call Restrictions No Restriction v e User Selection Select User This drop down list is used to select the user whose settings are displayed for editing e Base Card Expansion Module This value indicates the control unit base card or external expansion module of the user s extension port The 4 possible base cards are numbered 1 to 4 from left to right when facing the control unit The type of base card port is also indicated BP indicates an analog phone extension port BD indicates a digital DS or TCM port e Port This value indicates the port number on the control unit base card or the external expansion module Advanced Parameters e Ring Pattern Default 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for the call when alerting on a user extension The available patterns depend on the phone type e Abbreviated Ringing Default Active When active on an ETR or a Avaya digital station if a user is already connected to a call any additional call will give just a single quiet ring Note that for additional calls alerting on line appearance buttons the Immediate Delayed Ring or No Ring s
13. Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 IP Office Basic Edition Chapter 6 Appendix SMDR IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 186 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Appendix SMDR 6 Appendix SMDR The control unit is able to send SMDR Station Message Detail Reporting records to the IP address and port specified in the Advanced Parameters 135 settings Normally an SMDR record is output for each call between two parties when the call has been completed In some scenarios for example transfers and conferences separate SMDR records may be output for each part of the call See SMDR Examples 19h Each SMDR record contains call information in a comma separated format CSV format that is variable width fields with each field separated by commas See SMDR Fields 1881 SMDR Records e An SMDR record is generated for each call between two devices on the IP Office system Devices include extensions trunk lines or channels on a trunk voicemail channels conference channels and IP Office tones e Calls that are not presented to another device do not generate an SMDR record For example internal users dialing short code that simply changes a configuration setting e The SMDR record is generated when the call ends Therefore the order of the SMDR records output does not match the call start times e Each record contains a call ID which is increased by 1 for each subsequent c
14. Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 24 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 26 GMT Sent 48 of 46xxupgrade scr Sent 60 of 46xxupgrade scr Sent 72 of 46xxupgrade scr Sent 84 of 46xxuparade scr Sent 96 of 46xxupgrade scr Sent 14 of 46xxsettings txt Sent 28 of 46xxsettings txt Sent 43 of 46xxsettings txt Sent 57 of 46xxsettings txt Sent 72 of 46xxsettings txt Sent 86 of 46xxsettings txt Sent 100 of 46xxsettings txt Sent 10 of C Program Files amp vaya MP Office Managerb10d01b2_3 bin IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 181 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 3 Tools 5 3 1 Extension Renumber This tool can be used to change the numbering of user extensions in a system between 2 digit and 3 digit For 3 digit systems it can also be used to change the numbering of the extensions whereas 2 digits systems use the fixed extension numbers 10 to 57 It is strongly recommended that these options are only used and changed on a newly installed system Changing extension numbering affects other services including voicemail and may require extension reconfiguration of hunt groups and trunk call routes Uli Extension Renumber Default Numbering 3 Digt v
15. v Timers mmes Ye Ye IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 207 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 7 1 Phone Based Administration Many of the system settings can be programmed from extensions on the system if they are an Avaya phone The range of features programmable may also depend on the phone type The following phone types can be used ETR18D ETR34D M7324 M7310 T7316E T7316 1408 1416 9504 and 9508 The type of programming is divided into three categories e System Administration Refers to the system programming that can only be done by the first two extensions in the system e Centralized Programming Refers to the programming of other user extensions that can only be done by the first two extensions in the system e Telephone Programming Refers to the programming that an extension user can do of their own settings Category Key System Date and Time Line Settings Auxiliary Equipment Dialing Restrictions and Permissions Setting Access Type System Locale System Language System Mode Default Numbering Recall timer UE KIE RIE LOE LOE LIE LOE LUE LIE KaR LIE KaR KOE LOE KOE LOE KOE KOE LOE LOE LOE LOE LON LE LOE LOR KIE KOE KOE LOE KOE KOE KO lt x I lt I lt lt I lt I lt lt lt JO jxo I lt lt I lt I lt lt I lt lt I lt I lt lt I lt I lt lt I lt lt I lt I lt I lt I lt lt is wn
16. Await Dial Tone Yes Yes Intermediate Digit Pause Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Modem Enabled Yes Yes Advanced Echo Cancellation Yes Yes Gains A gt D Yes Yes aa Gains D gt A Yes Yes Digits to break dial tone Ye Ys Automatic Balance Impedance Match Yes ve Yes Yes BRI Trunk Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin ooo october s Anonymous e e coveragebbestineton ves s IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 205 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 PRI Trunk Settings Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Trunk Parameters Switch Type Yes Yes Yes Yes lt es es lt Yes es es es Yes es es es Zero Suppression lt Send Redirecting Number Yes es lt es es Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Dial Plan PRI Channels Appearance ID Coverage Destination i es es Yes es i Yes Yes Yes Yes VMS Auto Attendant Yes Yes Service Settings Yes Yes Yes lt Yes es lt es es lt Yes es es es lt Yes es lt lt Yes Yes Yes Yes z lt lt rir Fla OH v x s5 2 510 50 ol jz z o c o o Una 519 ajes o ovy lt 5 uo zm 5 eov 3 2 eS O c 0 yz amp 5 3 9 S 13 7 lt 9 e 3 Do vjs z 3 va a 0 Tg we 30 e
17. Configuration Settings IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 46 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings 3 Configuration Settings This section details the IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode configuration settings accessible through IP Office Manager 3 1 Remote Administrator Password This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Remote Administrator Password This menu cannot be accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 New systems use default security settings with the user name Administrator and password Administrator This is the password used by IP Office Manager for access to a system As a minimum you should change the Remote Administrator Password Failure to do so will leave the system potentially insecure This password is also used for connection to the system by the Administrator account to System Status Application System Monitor and IP Office Web Manager This command is greyed out and disabled when editing an off line configuration Changing the Remote Administration Password 1 From the Manager home page click Change Remote Administrator Password 2 The Change Password menu is displayed Change Password Change Password New Password Re Enter New Password Cancel 3 Enter the new password confirm it and click OK 4 Click Apply in the system page or click on the ial icon 5 In the Send Config
18. Extn13 E403 Libby Franks 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 02 00 00 24 0 17 0 13 13 1 1000013 0 E17 Ext n17 V11003 CO Channel 100 3 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 39 00 00 17 0 13 0 11 11 1 1000015 0 E13 Ext n13 V11002 CO Channel 100 2 8 0 2008 07 09 15 08 31 00 00 26 0 0 1 1000014 0 E11 Extnll V11001 CO Channel 100 1 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 45 00 00 12 0 0 403 403 0 1000016 0 E403 Libby Franks V11004 CO Channel 100 4 0 0 Transfer In this example 2126 has called 2102 The record 1 for this has the Continuation set a 1 indicating that it has further records In the following record 3 with the same Call ID it can be seen that the Party 2 Device and Party 2 Name fields have changed indicating that the call is now connected to a different device in this example 2121 We can infer the blind transfer from the intermediate record 2 which shows a call of zero Connected Time between the original call destination 2102 and the final destination 2121 2008 07 09 17 51 00 00 38 18 2126 0 2102 2102 1 1000019 1 E2126 Extn2126 E2102 Extn2102 19 0 2008 07 09 17 52 00 00 00 7 2102 0 2121 2121 1 1000020 0 E2102 Extn2102 E2121 Extn2121 0 0 2008 07 09 17 51 00 00 39 16 2126 0 2102 2102 1 1000019 0 E2126 Extn2126 E2121 Extn2121 0 0 In this second example extension 22 answers an external call and then transfers it to extension 23 Again the two legs of the external call have the same time date stamp and same call ID 2008 08 01 15 23 37 00 00 04 7 01707299
19. File Edit View Tools Help HR A Wie mae Folders 5 C IP500 Site A C3 bail Name Delete Copy Size E ctypes 0 9 5 win 186479 holdmusic wav 170716 Download Ctrl Del Ctrl C Please review the current IP Office Setup below Control Unit IP 500 V2 Internal Modules ETR6 DIGSTAB Unknown COMBO621 0 ATM4 Expansion Modules NONE Feature Key None Serial Number 008007052123 i System Settings IP Address 192 168 0 3 Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 System Locale United States US English Number assigned to first Extension 10 Number of Extensions on System 22 Features Confiqured Fe Deke 0 0 0 0 00 Date Modifed 29 04 2008 13 39 46 56637 Announcement Data Type Modified Application 30 09 20 Name Wave Sound 15 10 20 Size bytes Label Extn203 GREETING Format 8 71 Avaya IP Office R7 UpgradeWiz 6 0 10 C Program Files Avaya lP Office Manager Name 00E007019D5D 00E007019D5D 192 168 42 1 Conf500v2 DDI_Conf406v2 IP Address 192 168 44 1 v Eng Uniti Eng Uniti 192 168 46 1 Unit Broadcast Address 255 255 255 255 v Type IP 406 DS IP 406 DS IP 406 DS DIG DCPx16 DIG DCPx16 DIG DCPx16 DIG DCPx16 Backup system files Upload system files DER Version Licensed Available Status 3 2 6 3Unlicensed 32 5 Select Directory Refresh Selec
20. For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 773 Default destination for fixed Default DID entry in DID Call Mapping table ie matches any call where there is no other specific match IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 16 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features Key System or PBX System 1 3 Dial Plan Extension Numbering The system can be configured to use either a 2 digit or 3 digit dial plan for user extensions e For a 2 digit dial plan the extensions are numbered 10 to 57 This numbering cannot be changed e For a 3 digit dial plan the extensions are numbered from 100 upwards This numbering can be changed in the range 100 to 579 the defaults are 100 to 199 In 2 digit mode only 48 extensions are supported in 3 digit mode a maximum of 100 extensions are supported e In both cases those extensions not matched by physical ports are automatically assigned as phantom extensions 225 e The system assumes that the base control unit is always fully populated with up to 32 extensions either real or phantom or a mix to which it assigns extension numbers in sequence It does this before assigning extension numbers to any real extensions on attached external expansion modules up to the system extension limit If the system extension limit has not been exceeded any remaining ext
21. IP Office systems Configuring Manager for Known System Discovery Use of known systems discovery is not enabled by default The IP Office Manager must be configured for the feature with a file location to which it can store and retrieve known system details 1 Select File Preferences 2 Select the Directories tab SERERE Working Directory cfa files C Program Filess amp vayaMP Office amp M anager m Binary Directory bin files C Program Files vayaMP Office M anager m Known Units File C Program FilessAvayaMP Office anagersknownlP csv ad 3 In the Known Units File field enter the directory path and file name for a CSV file into which Manager can write details of the IP Office systems it discovers If the file specified does not exist it will be created by Manager 4 Click OK Using Known System Discovery 1 When the Select IP Office screen is displayed click on Known Units H Known IP Office Systems Fiter IF SystemN ame MACAddress SystemType PAddress SoftwareVersion IP500 Site B 00e007026704 IP 500 192 168 44 1 4 0 51101 IP500 SiteA O0e007026fac IP 500 192 168 42 1 4 0 51101 IP403 Site C O0e0070186fe IP 403 192 168 46 1 3 2 17 2 The screen displays the list of IP Office systems previously discovered and stored in the CSV file e To select an IP Office control unit highlight the row containing unit data and click OK The selected unit will appear in the Select IP Office
22. The Auto Attendant field drop down list is used to select which auto attendant is being configured Configure Profiles Auto Attendant Partner Auto Attendant 1 sve Add Delete Greeting Times Name Maximum Inactivity 8 Menu Prompt Each menu uses its own Y Morning Dial By Direct Number 7 Follow Night Service C to Dial By Name Match Order Last then First v diese Lanquage United States US English v to Profile Record greeting Alarm Extension Morning Evening Aftemoon to 21 00 v Evening Out of office hours Menu options 841 Emergency Greeting g Setup Auto Attendant Actions Type Moming Aftemoon Evening Out of Hours Action Destination Transfer to Number Dial by Number Dial by Number Dial by Number Dial by Number Copy Morning selector codes to all menus IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 132 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Auto Attendant Setup When Do Calls Go to an Auto Attendant The IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode voicemail supports the configuration of up to 9 auto attendant services to answer and redirect calls If an auto attendant has been configured it can be used to answer calls as follows e Immediate Auto Attendant Service One of the auto attendants can be specified as the Cov
23. The number dialed e Number The number to be dialed to line e Service Default AT amp T The service required by the call from SDN inc GSDN MegaCom800 MegaCom Wats Accunet ILDS I800 ETN Private Line or AT amp T Multiquest IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 103 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 3 3 T1 Trunks This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting Trunks If a PRI trunk with the Line Subtype of T1 is selected in the list of installed trunks its settings are displayed below the list of installed trunks Clicking on Advanced Setup 108 accesses a menu of additional settings for the trunk and settings for the trunk s individual channels e IP500 PRI Channel Licenses The IP500 PRI 1 trunk daughter card supports the use of its first 8 channels unlicensed Use of additional channels require licenses to be added to the configuration The maximum number of channels depends on the current Line Sub Type setting of the PRI trunk Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Card Module Number of Channels Analog Trunk 2 1 Analog Trunk 2 1 Advanced Setup T1 Trunk Channel Setup Unique Line Ringing QEEEEENEENCTIONEN RN 2 Dut Of Service None Channel Appearance ID In Service Coverage Destination Dut Of Service Non
24. Use Authentication Name This field sets the Name value for SIP calls using this URI The value can either be entered manually or the options Use Authentication Name or Use Internal Data selected Destination Where incoming calls with matching digits should be routed The drop down list contains the extensions and groups on the IP Office system e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 771 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Groupi 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e 76 Modem For Release 6 1 the option 76 Modem can be selected to route the call to the systems built in V32 modem 234 function This is intended for basic configuration access by system maintainers e Auto Attendant For Release 6 1 any of the configured voicemail auto attendants can be selected as the call destination Registration Required When on each local URI with unique Authentication credentials will register independently Authentication Name When ma
25. as defined in RFC 3262 provides a mechanism to ensure the delivery of provisional responses such as announcement messages Provisional responses provide information on the status of the call request that is still in progress e Example When a call to a mobile or cell phone is in the process of being connected there may be a delay while the cell phone is located Provisional information allow features such as an announcement please wait while we attempt to reach the subscriber to be played while the call setup is still in progress e REFER Support Default On Software level 7 0 REFER is the method used by many SIP devices including SIP trunks to transfer calls These settings can be used to control whether REFER is used as the method to transfer calls on this SIP trunk to another call on the same trunk If supported once the transfer has been completed the IP Office system is no longer involved in the call If not supported the transfer may still be completed but the call will continue to be routed via the IP Office e Incoming Default Auto Select whether REFER can or should be used when an attempt to transfer an incoming call on the trunk results in an outgoing call on another channel on the same trunk The options are e Always Always use REFER for call transfers that use this trunk for both legs of the transfer If REFER is not supported the call transfer attempt is stopped IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manage
26. e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 77 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e Unique Line Ringing Default 1 Software level 6 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for calls when alerting on an extension Calls forwarded sent to call coverage or to a hunt group will always use the line ring pattern Calls direct to an extension will use the line ringing pattern unless the user has Override Line Ringing set Not used for calls presented to the user as a member of the Operator group This feature is also not used for BST phones IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 82 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks 3 5 1 1 Analog Advanced Setup This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 l
27. e Tx Gain Default 0dB The transmit gain in dB e Rx Gain Default 0dB The receive gain in dB e VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant when the system is not running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Days Only e VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant when the system is running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Night Only e VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when the VMS Delay settings above should be used and unanswered calls redirected to an auto attendant The options are e Always Redirect calls when the system is in both day and night service 21 modes e Day Only Redirect calls only when the system is not in night service e Night Only Redirect calls only when the system is in night service e Never Do not redirect calls e VMS Auto Attendant Default Auto Attendant 1 Software Level 6 1 This field allows selection of which auto attendant is used by this line Timers for selected channel Only adjust these values under guidance from the line provider IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 110 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings T
28. each of which enables an additional two channels For IP Office Release7 0 each license also enables an additional 5 hours of storage IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 8 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features 1 1 What s New in Release 8 0 The following changes and additional features have been made for an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system running IP Office Release 8 0 software Name Changes The name for these systems has changed from IP Office Essential Edition Norstar Mode IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Mode and IP Office Essential Edition Quick Mode to IP Office Basic Edition Norstar Mode IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode and IP Office Basic Edition This is to clarify the operational and functional distinction from IP Office Essential Edition IP Office Preferred Edition and IP Office Advanced Edition modes Changed Default Administrator Password The default password for the Administrator account used for access to the system using IP Office Manager has changed from password to Administrator This applies to new systems and to systems that are defaulted Phone Based Administration During a Call The ability to enter and use phone base administration menus during a call is now supported on all phone types capable of phone based administration Previously this option was limited to ETR M Series and T Series phones It includes entering syst
29. for example when the target of an incoming call or a transfer does not support the codec originally negotiated on the trunk Requires the ITSP to also support Re Invite e Use Offered Codec Default Off Normally for SIP calls the answerer s codec preference is used This option can be used to override that behavior and use the codec preferences offered by the caller e Fax Transport Support Default Off Software level 8 0 This option is only available if Re Invite Supported is selected When enabled the system performs fax tone detection on calls routed via the line and if fax tone is detected renegotiates the call codec as configured below The SIP line provider must support the selected fax method and Re Invite e None Select this option if fax is not supported by the line provider e G711 G711 is used for the sending and receiving of faxes e T38 T38 is used for the sending and receiving of faxes e T38 Fallback T38 is used for the sending and receiving of faxes On outgoing fax calls if the called destination does not support T38 a re invite it sent for fax transport using G711 e PRACK 100rel Supported Default Off Software level 8 0 This option sets whether Provisional Reliable Acknowledgement PRACK and 100rel are enabled 100rel allows SDP negotiation to be completed while the call is in ringing state and allows further media changes for announcements or progress tones before a call is actually answered PRACK
30. for example follow a forward on busy setting and then return to the user s mailbox are screened e While a call is being screened the phone can be used to either answer or ignore the screened call Auto answer options are ignored e Answering a screened call While a call is being screened it can be answered by pressing the Answer soft key On ETR phones pressing the MIC HFAI button will answer the call Pressing the call appearance or line button on which the call is indicated will also answer the call e When answered e The phone s microphone is unmuted and a normal call between the user and the caller now exists e The voicemail recording stops but that portion of the call already recorded is left as a new message in the user s mailbox e Ignoring a screened call While a call is being screened it can be ignored by pressing the Ignore soft key if displayed On 1400 and 9500 Series phones pressing the SPEAKER button will ignore the call On ETR phones pressing the SPKR button will ignore the call On M Series and T Series phones pressing the Release key will ignore the call On all phones the Call Screening button can be press to both turn off call screening and to ignore the currently screened call e When ignored e The call continues to be recorded until the caller hangs up or transfers out of the mailbox e The user s phone returns to idle with call screening still enabled However any other call that has already gone to vo
31. me Auto Attendant fand Incoming Call Route E conference proposal consultation cal etd EN Xd Transfer proposal consultation call Transferred call Remote Access Service IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 189 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 29 External Targeter Id The associated name of the targeter indicated in the External Targeting Cause field For hunt groups and users this will be their name in the IP Office configuration For an Incoming Call Route this will be the Tag if set otherwise ICR 30 External Targeted Number This field is used for forwarded calls to an external line It shows the external number called by the IP Office as a result of the off switch targeting where as other called fields give the original number dialed IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 190 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Appendix SMDR SMDR Fields 6 2 SMDR Examples The following are examples of IP Office SMDR records for common call scenarios Basic Examples Lost incoming Call In this record the Call duration is zero and the Continuation field is 0 indicating that the call was never connected The Ring Time shows that it rang for 9 seconds before ending 2008 06 28 09 28 41 00 00 00 9 8004206 1 4324 4324 0 1000014155 0 E4324 Joe Bloggs T9161 LINE 5 1 0 0 Call Answered by Voicemail In this example 15
32. pressing this button allows the user to then press another active line appearance or intercom button to view caller number information for that call Call ID Name Display 159 Action Data None On some phones after the call is answered the call display is not able to show both the caller ID name and number This function allows the user on such phones to toggle between the name and the number If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off Call Screening 15 Action Data None A button set to this function is used to enable or disable call screening While enabled when a caller is presented to the user s voicemail mailbox if the user s phone is idle they will hear through the phone s handsfree speaker the caller leaving the message and can select to answer or ignore the call Direct Line Pickup Active 145 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to pickup a ringing held or connected call on the specified line Users can also dial intercom 68LL where LL is the line number Direct Line Pickup Idle 154 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to seize and make a call using the specified line if that line is idle Users can also dial intercom 8LL where LL is the line number IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 67 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e Group Pickup 155 Action Da
33. set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 771 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e The Coverage Destination is not used for SIP trunks with their direction set to Incoming Call by Call IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 113 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e Unique Line Ringing Default 1 Software level 6 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for calls when alerting on an extension Calls forwarded sent to call coverage or to a hunt group will always use the line ring pattern Calls direct to an extension will use the line ringing pattern unless the user has Override Line Ringing set Not used for calls presented to the user as a member of the Operator group This feature is also not used for BST phones e Registration Required When on each local URI with unique Authentication credentials will register independently e Authentication Name When making a call some service providers will often send an authentication challenge to validate the call before it is connected This challenge requires the INVITE is re submitted with Authentication data including a network account name pr
34. 800MB for NET2 600MB for the full IP Office Admin suite Display 800 x 600 256 Colors 1024 x 768 16 bit High Color Operating Supported on Windows XP Pro Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 2003 and Windows System 2008 e 32 bit and 64 bit versions are supported e Vista support is only on Business Enterprise and Ultimate versions e Windows 7 support is only on Professional Enterprise and Ultimate versions IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 29 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Installing the IP Office Admin Applications 1 Using the Add or Remove Programs option in the Windows Control Panel check that the PC does not already have a version of the IP Office Admin suite installed e If yes and the suite is a pre IP Office 3 2 version remove the existing IP Office Admin suite via Add Remove Programs e If the existing suite is IP Office 3 2 or higher it is possible to upgrade without removing the previous installation However if the system already has a USB Feature Key the key should be removed prior to upgrading and then reinserted and the PC restarted 2 Insert the IP Office Administrator Applications DVD Select the option for the IP Office Administration Suit A folder window will display the installation files for the administration suite 3 Double click on setup exe 4 Select the language you want to use for the installation process This does not affect the lang
35. A button set to this function allows the user to redial the last external number dialed Loudspeaker Paging 154 A button set to this function allows the user to redial the last external number a dialed Message Alert For IP Office Release 7 0 a button set to this function allows a user to see the Notification A current state of other user s message waiting lamps It can only be used in conjunction with other users for which this user has Auto Dial Intercom 14 i buttons configured Night Service Button 21 gt A night service button is used to switch night service on off Pickup Group 155 A button set to this function allows the user to answer a call being presented to any extension that is a member of the pickup group configured for the button Privacy 155 A button set to this function allows the user to turn privacy on or off When on other extensions are not able to bridge into the user s calls Recall 155 A button set to this function allows the user to send a recall or hook flash signal cm Save Number Redial 15 A button set to this function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer Simultaneous Page 15 A button set to this function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer pressing the button pro
36. Basic Edition Quick Mode systems and so is not covered by this document IP Office Configuration Mode When the configuration from an IP Office system running in IP Office Essential Edition is opened in Manager Manager displays options for that mode This mode is not covered by this document EA Avaya IP Office R7 Manager Ele Edit View Help WELCOME to IP Office Administration What would you like to do Create an Offline Configuration Open Configuration from System Read a Configuration from File Vil Avaya IP Office R7 Manager File Edit View Tools Help id i8 ENE v gt j IP Offices R BOOTP 3 4 Operator 3 IP Offices R BOOTP 3 Operator 3 5 IP ffice 1 ss System 1 4 Line 0 Control Unit 4 4 Extension 42 amp User 43 Ai HuntGroup 2 X Short Code 60 Service 0 PAS 1 Incoming Call Route 2 tB WarPott 1 x Directory 0 2 Time Profile 1 Firewall Profile 1 Ell IP Route 1 K Least Cost Routing 0 m Account Code 1 i Licence 5 if Tunnel 0 Z Logical LAN 0 fig User Rights 2 Auto Attendant 0 Authorisation Code 0 x E911 System 1 Error List Config Ite Record Description EVE T 201 Extn201 Name Standard User Extension Voicemail On PhoneManager Type Exn209 d Extn201 4c Pro Lite Extn201 201 OE Me ll User Voicemail DND ShortCodes Source Numbers Telephony Forwardi
37. Call the auto attendant 1 to 9 specified 7801 to 7809 Auto Attendant Access 801 to 864 Idle Line Pickup 865 to 899 Seize a Line Seize an available trunk in the ARS selector group 65 to 99 This is supported only on systems with their Mode set to PBX Seize a line in order to then make a call on that line Dial 8 followed by the line number 01 to 64 gt o o iv 7 External Call Prefix Key Start an outgoing external call The line used is automatically selected using Idle Line Preference PBX Optional external dialing prefix The use of 9 can be removed or swapped with 0 the operator number using the Outside Line setting Page Direct Call Putting in front of an internal number will attempt to make either a page or direct call If the target is a group the call is a page call to all the idle members of the group If the target is an extension the call is an auto answered call to that number If the target cannot auto answer the call becomes a normal call Simultaneous Page Make a page call to the users in Calling Group 1 and to the extension configured as the system s Loudspeaker Paging extension IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 18 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features Dial Plan Auto Attendant Numbers Dialing the appropriate number shown in the table below allows recording and playback of the matching auto attendant prompt It
38. On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 11 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 4 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 149 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 4 10 Call Pickup A button set to this function allows the user to pickup a call alerting at a specified extension Separate buttons can be created for each extension for which call pickup is required e If an extension already has a button set to this function and target creating another button with this function to the same target will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 6 followed by the extension number 4 11 Caller ID Inspect A button set to this function allows the user to see the caller ID of a call on another line without interrupting the current call to which they are connected e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 17 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 0 4 12 Caller ID Log A button set to this function a
39. Parameters Incoming Outgoing VMS Delay VMS Delay VMS YMS Auto Channel Appearance ID Type Trunk Type Trunk Type RxGain TxGain Day Night Schedule Attendant Out OFS Wink Start Wink Start OdB Out Of Service Wink Start art Out Of Service Wink Start Wink Start Out Of Service Wink Start Wink Start Out Of Service Wink Start Wink Start Out Of Service Wink Start Wink Start Out Of Service Wink Start Wink Start Out Of Service Wink Start wink Start Timers for selected channel Outgoing Seizure 10 Outgoing Dial Guard 580 Incoming Dial Guard 50 Flash Hook Detect a0 Wink Start 5000 Outgoing IMM Dial Guard 1500 Incoming Confirm 20 Incoming Disconnect 300 Wink Validated 80 Outgoing Pulse Dial Break 60 Incoming Automatic Delay 410 Incoming Disconnect Guard 800 Wink End 350 Outgoing Pulse Dial Make 40 2 Incoming Wink Delay 100 Disconnected Signal Eror 240000 Delay End 5000 Outgoing Pulse Dial InterDigit 720 First Incoming Digit 15000 4 Outgoing Disconnect 300 Wink Signal 200 Outgoing Pulse Dial Pause 1500 Incoming Inter Digit 5000 2 Outgoing Disconnect Guard 800 Ring Verify Duration 220 Outgoing End Of Dial 1000 Maximum Inter Digit 300 Silent Interva
40. Publi IP Address o 0 0 Public Port SMTP Server Configuration C Busy Tone Detection redus IP Address 0 0 0 0 Mode System Fre Email From amp ddress Port 25 jle Freq 42 C Server Requires Authentication ial Freg 10Hz 48 62 User Name th F1 On 5 Password Use Challenge Response Authentication IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 138 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Advanced Parameters Advanced System Settings Enable Network Time Synchronization Default On When selected the system will use the time included in the ICLID on incoming calls as its system time Note that this feature uses the first analog trunk on the card installed in slot 1 of the system control unit Hold Reminder Time Default 60 seconds Range 0 Off to 180 seconds This setting controls how long calls remain on hold before recalling to the user who held the call Note that the recall only occurs if the user has no other connected call Recalled calls will continue ringing and do not follow forwards or go to voicemail Transfer Return Ring Default 4 20 seconds Range 1 to 180 seconds Sets the delay after which any call transferred by a user that remains unanswered should return to the user A return call will continue ringing and does not follow any forwards or go to voicemail Transfer return will occur if the user has an avail
41. Renumber From Start Extension 100 v End Extension Renumber To Start Extension e Default Numbering Select whether the systems uses 2 Digit or 3 Digit extension numbering In 2 digit systems the user extensions are fixed as 10 to 57 In 3 digit systems the user extension are numbered 100 upwards by default but can be renumbered In 2 digit mode only 48 extensions are supported in 3 digit mode a maximum of 100 extensions are supported e Renumber From Renumber to These options are available for systems set to 3 Digit numbering They can be used to renumber selected extensions The extension numbers are restricted to the range 100 to 579 5 3 2 Import Templates IP Office Manager can be used to import SIP trunk templates 122 and analog trunk templates These need to be stored in a specific Manager VTemplates sub folder This command can be used to select a folder containing template files and copy those files into the Manager sub folder The availability of this command is controlled by the File Preferences Visual Preferences Enable Template Options IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 182 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands Tools 5 4 Embedded File Management The contents of the SD memory card used by the system can be viewed through Manager Wa Avaya IP Office R7 Manager Edit View Tools Help holdmusic wav C IP500 Site A i Type Modifi
42. Server Address Ys Ys Mobility Caller 1D Format ys ys UseTelURI ve ve cekoos w Ye Call Routing Method Ye ys Association Method 1 Ys ys CallRouteViaRegister Ye Ye Name Priority Ye s User Agent and Server Headers Yes Yes UPDATESuppoted Ys ys SeparateRegister Ys ys VoIP Parameters Compression Mode Ys Ys VoIP Silence Suppression Yes Ves Call Initiation Timeout Ys ys Re Invite Support Ys Ys DTMF Support s Ye UseOffereedCodec Ys ys Registration Expiry Ys ys PRACK 100rel Supported ys Ys Fax Transport Support Ys ys Caller ID from From Header Yes Yes SendFrominClear Ys ys Refer Support Refersupprt Ye Ys Incoming Ye s Outgoing s s AppearanceID 0 Ye s Display Name Ys Ys Authentication Name Ys ys Password Ye s Channel Setup Direction s ys LocalURI Ye ve Anonymous Ye s Registration Required Yes Yes P AsserteID
43. Since the calls go immediately to voicemail no transfer return is supported e Joining or bridging to a call that has been sent to a phantom extension s mailbox will drop the phantom extension from the call in the same way it does for a physical extension e Calls to a phantom extension cannot be picked up e The phantom extensions are supported within the auto attendant actions Dial by Name Dial by Number and Transfer to Number e Mailbox access for message collection and mailbox configuration is achieved by dialing 778 from any telephone then entering the phantom extension number and the mailbox access code if it has already been configured Mailboxes with a configured access code can also be accessed by external calls e Phantom extensions can be used as the line coverage extension for a line In this case the phantom extension s VMS Coverage Rings setting is used before the call goes to the phantom user s mailbox e Auto Dial Intercom buttons can be set to route calls to a phantom extension e When using the Manager application when selecting extensions in the various menus a phantom extension is indicated by a character The extensions Equipment Type is fixed as Phantom e The phantom extension s Automatic VMS Coverage setting can be used to disable mailbox operation If this is done calls to the phantom extension will hear busy tone The following features are specifically are not supported using phantom extensions e A
44. Some functions are only supported on buttons that include lights to indicate status If programmed onto a button without lights the function may not work IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 146 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 4 2 Manager Buttons Button Programming Button Programming Functions In some cases the names used for the programming of button features in the Manager application differ from those used in the phone based administration menus The table below matches the names used by each interface There are also some functions available through Manager that are not accessible through phone based administration Phone Manager Absent Text Il Picku Absent Message Caller ID Name Display Call Los Caller ID Log Call Log Account Code Entry Auto Dial Other Auto Dial Intercom Call Coverage Caller ID Inspect Conference Drop Contact Closure 1 Contact Closure 2 Active Line Pickup Idle Line Pickup Do Not Disturb Calling Group IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Phone Manager ae Hot Dial Hot Dial acy all Save Number Redial VMS Cover VMS Cover Wake Up Service Wake Up Service Privacy Privacy Recall Recall Page 147 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 4 3 Absent Message A button set to this function allows the user to set or clear an absent message for display on t
45. Symmetric NAT A symmetric NAT is one where all requests from the same internal IP address and port to a specific destination IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port If the same host sends a packet with the same source address and port but to a different destination a different mapping is used Furthermore only the external host that receives a packet can send a UDP packet back to the internal host SIP Packets need to be mapped but STUN will not provide the correct information unless the IP address on the STUN server is the same as the ITSP Host If this type of NAT Firewall is detected or manually selected a warning Communication is not possible unless the STUN server is supported on same IP address as the ITSP will be displayed as part of the manager validation e Full Cone NAT A full cone NAT is one where all requests from the same internal IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port Furthermore any external host can send a packet to the internal host by sending a packet to the mapped external address SIP packets need to be mapped to NAT address and Port any Host in the internet can call in on the open port that is the local info in the SDP will apply to multiple ITSP Hosts e Restricted Cone NAT A restricted cone NAT is one where all requests from the same internal IP address and port are mapped to the same external IP address and port Unlike a full cone NAT an external
46. Trunk Administration 111 3 5 5 Outbound Call Handling 122 3 6 Auxiliary Equipment s 127 3 6 1 Door Phone eterne e erre 128 3 6 2 Music on Hold see 129 3 6 3 9MDR i Hi Addenda Gains 130 3 6 4 Contact Closure Group 131 3 7 Auto Attendant Setup sssseee 132 3 8 Advanced Parameters sssseeee 138 4 Button Programming 4 1 Button Programming Functions IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Contents 4 2 Manager Buttons ssssssssssseeeeees 147 4 3 Absent Message sessee emen 148 4 4 Account Code Entry 148 4 5 Active Line Pickup eesem 148 4 6 Auto Dial Intercom 148 4 7 Auto Dial Other sssssssssssseeeeee 148 4 8 Call Coverage ssesseee emen 149 4 9 Call Forwarding iiit tritt ete 149 4710 Call Pick p oe ete etnies 150 4 11 Caller ID Inspect ssem aeei 150 4 12 Caller ID Log sssseeneeenerennenen 150 4 13 Caller ID Name Display eese 150 4 14 Calling Group eiii teneri 150 4 15 Call Screening ient 151 4 16 Conference Drop ssssssssseeeeenees 153 4 17 Contact Closure 1 sese 153 4 18 Contact Clos
47. backup its memory card files as part of the upgrade e The Upload system files option will upload various files e It copies the binary files used by the IP Office control unit and external expansion modules e It copies the firmware files used by phones supported by the system e For systems configured to running in IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode or IP Office Basic Edition Norstar Mode mode the files for IP Office Web Manager are copied e For systems configured to run Embedded Voicemail the Embedded Voicemail prompts for those supported languages set as the system locale user locales incoming call route locales and short code locales are upgraded In addition the English language prompts are upgraded as follows IP Office A Law Norstar SD Cards UK English IP Office U Law PARTNER SD Cards US English IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 172 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 173 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Searching for Particular Systems The default address used by the Upgrade Wizard is the address shown in the Manager title bar which is selected through File Preferences 164 If the unit required is not found the address used can be changed 1 Enter or select the required address in the Unit Broadcast Addr
48. be configured into the system There are two separate menus one for Door Phone 1 and one for Door Phone 2 Each has the same range of settings Auxiliary Equipment Door Phone 1 Setup Door Phone 1 Assign Extension None v Door Phone Extensions to be alerted Available Items Selected Items Contact Closure Group 1 10 Em 11 d Contact Closure Group 2 12 3 Add All Music On Hold n y 15 lt Remove SMDR 16 17 lt lt Remove All 18 19 w e Assign Extension Default None Use the drop down list to select the extension to which the door phone is connected The extension Equipment Type User Setup Advanced Settings 7 is set to Door Phone 1 or Door Phone 2 as appropriate e Extensions to be alerted Default None This table is used to select which extensions are alerted and can answer when the door phone is used IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 128 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Auxiliary Equipment 3 6 2 Music on Hold This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Setup Auxiliary Equipments This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Auxiliary Equipment The phone system supports an external music on hold source This is played to callers when they are put on hold The source of the music is connected to the phone system by the system maintainer
49. by right clicking on them and selecting Delete e Downloading Files Files can also be copied from the card by right clicking on the file and selecting Download Manager will prompt for the download location Existing files are overwritten if present e To exit back to normal configuration operation select File Configuration from the menu bar Alternatively to view the card in another system select File Close File Settings and then File Open File Settings IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 183 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 4 1 Open File Settings Select an IP Office system and display the contents of its memory cards if any are present and in use 5 4 2 Close File Settings Close the current memory card contents listing without exiting embedded file management mode 5 4 3 Refresh File Settings This command can be used to request a file update from the IP Office system 5 4 4 Upload File This command can be used to select and upload a file to the memory card in the IP Office system 5 4 5 Upload System Files When this command is selected Manager will upload the software files for IP Office to the System SD card It includes all IP Office software phone software and Embedded Voicemail prompts not already present on the System SD card e WARNING After this command the system will reboot The reboot will end all calls and services in progress e It copies the bin
50. call coverage VMS coverage and call forwarding settings are applied to the call Any extension can be used as the destination including a phantom extension e Hunt Group The call is presented in sequence to each of the available members of a selected hunt group until answered Any of the 6 sequential hunt groups can be used as the destination e Auto Attendant Coverage Each line can be configured to send unanswered calls to an auto attendant after a set delay which can be set to 0 for immediate answer This can be set to operate when the system is in day and or night service This is done using the VMS Schedule VMS Delay Day VMS Delay Night and VMS Auto Attendant settings of each line The following methods can be used to override the normal call routing detailed above e DID Call Mapping For BRI ETSI PRI and PRI trunks if the incoming call matches a configured DID and or ICLID number the Coverage Destination setting for the DID ICLID match is used rather than the line s Coverage Destination DID can also be used on some types of T1 trunk e SIP Call by Call Table For SIP trunks if the incoming call matches a configured URI it is presented to the extension or group specified in the SIP line s Call by Call Table e Night Service 2 Switching on night service overrides the routing of calls to Coverage Destinations Instead the calls change to alerting the users who are members of the Night Service group The settings for auto
51. calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 771 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e Unique Line Ringing Default 1 Software level 6 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for calls when alerting on an extension Calls forwarded sent to call coverage or to a hunt group will always use the line ring pattern Calls direct to an extension will use the line ringing pattern unless the user has Override Line Ringing set Not used for calls presented to the user as a member of the Operator group This feature is also not used for BST phones IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 97 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 DID Mapping Table This table is used to set the destination for incoming calls that include DID digits These are routed by matching the DID and ICLID information received
52. command can be used to select the full mode rather than simplified view 405 The full mode is not used by IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems Manager will automatically return to simplified view mode if an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system configuration is loaded This option is not available when an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system configuration is loaded 5 2 4 Hide Admin Tasks This settings shows or hides the Admin Tasks List 43 available when Manager has a configuration from a system loaded 5 2 5 TFTP Log This command displays the TFTP Log window This window shows TFTP traffic between Manager and devices that uses TFTP to send and receive files For example the TFTP Log below shows an Avaya IP phone requesting and then being sent its software files TFTP Log Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 05 36 GMT Log started Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 14 GMT Received BOOTP request for 00096e052f20 Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 14 GMT Sending BOOTP response to 00096e052f20 Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 19 GMT Received BOOTP request for O0096e052f20 Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 19 GMT Sending BOOTP response to 00096e052f20 Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Sent 12 of 46xxupgrade scr Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Sent 24 of 46xxupgrade scr Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Sent 36 of 46xxupgrade scr Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT Thu 02 Mar 2006 13 06 23 GMT
53. default it contains all analog lines in the system however it can be edited to change the lines included 66 ISDN Standard Call Local Number Default This entry cannot be deleted Calls routed to this entry will use an available ISDN line with the calling party information set to match the user s User CLI if set or otherwise blank to be set by the provider e 67 ISDN Number Withheld Local Number Withheld This entry cannot be deleted Calls routed to this entry will use an available ISDN line with the calling party information set to withheld e Type The ARS Selector group can be used for the following functions IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 124 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks e Group of Lines This type of selector is used to create a group of lines The lines are selected using the Select Lines table below For a call routed to this selector an available line from that group is used e ISDN Local Number This type of selector is used to set an outgoing local number on an ISDN call For a call routed to this ARS selector an available ISDN channel is used with the calling party element of the Q 931 setup set to match the local number specified e Changing the calling party number may not be supported by the line provider or may be an additional chargeable service It will also be subject to restrictions on what numbers can be used It i
54. from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks Trunk Parameters e Line Number The BRI line number For information only e TEI Default 0 This is the Terminal Equipment Identifier number associated with the line It is used to identify each device connected to a particular ISDN line For Point to Point lines this is 0 It can also be 0 on a Point to Multipoint line however if multiple devices are sharing a Point to Multipoint line it should be set to 127 which results in the exchange allocating the TEIs to be used by each device IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 90 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks 3 5 3 PRI Trunks PRI trunks can be set to a number of different line subtypes PRI T1 and ETSI The options depend on the Country 48 setting of system e PRI 964 Available for Canada Mexico and United States Supports up to 23 channels T1104 Available for Canada Mexico and United States Supports up to 24 channels e ETSI 924 Available for countries other than Canada Mexico and United States Supports up to 30 channels e IP500 PRI Channel Licenses The IP500 PRI 1 trunk daughter card supports the use of its first 8 channels unlicensed Use of additional channels require licenses to be added to the configuration The maximum number of channels depends on the current Line Sub Type setting of the PRI trunk IP Office Basic Ed
55. in SIP request headers made by this line Setting a unique value can be useful in call diagnostics when the system has multiple SIP trunks e UPDATE Supported Default Never Software level 8 0 The SIP UPDATE method RFC 3311 allows a client to update parameters of a session such as the set of media streams and their codecs but has no impact on the state of a dialog It is similar to re INVITE but can be sent before the initial INVITE has completed This allows it to update session parameters within early dialogs VOIP Parameters e Compression Mode Default Automatic Selection This defines the type of compression which is to be used for calls on this line e Call Initiation Timeout Default 4 seconds Sets how long to wait for successful connection before treating the line as busy e DTMF Support Default RFC2833 This setting is used to select the method by which DTMF key presses are signaled to the remote end The supported options are In Band RFC2833 or Info e Registration Expiry Default 60 minutes This setting defines how often registration with the SIP ITSP is renewed following any previous registration e VOIP Silence Suppression Default Off When selected this option will detect periods of silence on any call over the line and will not send any data during those silent periods e RE Invite Supported Default Off When enabled Re Invite can be used during a session to change the characteristics of the session
56. is associated with an incoming SIP request The search for a line match for an incoming request is done against each line until a match occurs If no match occurs the request is ignored This method allow multiple SIP lines with the same address settings This may be necessary for scenarios where it may be required to support multiple SIP lines to the same ITSP For example when the same ITSP supports different call plans on separate lines or where all outgoing SIP lines are routed from the system via an additional on site system e By Source IP Address This option uses the source IP address and port of the incoming request for association The match is against the configured remote end of the SIP line using either an IP address port or the resolution of a fully qualified domain name This matches the method used by pre 8 0 systems e From header hostpart against ITSP domain This option uses the host part of the From header in the incoming SIP request for association The match is against the line s Domain Name e R URI hostpart against ITSP domain This option uses the host part of the Request URI header in the incoming SIP request for association The match is against the line s Domain Name e To header hostpart against ITSP domain This option uses the host part of the To header in the incoming SIP request for association The match is against the line s Domain Name e From header hostpart against DNS resolved ITSP domain This option us
57. is known that the analog trunks do not provide disconnect clear signalling or reliable busy tone When enabled e Disconnect clear signalling detection is turned off Busy tone detection remains on e Unsupervised transfers and trunk to trunk transfers of analog trunk calls are not allowed e A wider range of busy tones which may signal that the caller has disconnected are used to disconnect calls connected to voicemail IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 51 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 2 1 List Management This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Create Calling Lists This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 4 list by selecting System List Management Calling lists control the numbers user can or cannot dial You can also indicate which lists a user belongs to through the User Setup 61 menu System List Management Allowed Lists Allowed List Number 1 E Disallowed Lists Telephone Numbers in list Emergency Number Lists 28 Digit Number Account Code Entries 06 02 07 03 08 04 09 05 10 Valid digits are 0 9 and Wildcard Assign Users to list Available Users Selected Users 10 Add gt 11 E Je Add All gt gt 13 LJ 14 15 lt Remove 15 17 lt lt Remove All 18 M After highlighting the ite
58. long You can also use the character as a single digit wildcard System List Management Allowed Lists Disallowed List Number 1 v Telephone Numbers in list Disallowed Lists Emergency Number Lists 28 Digit Number Account Code Entries 06 02 07 03 08 04 09 05 10 Valid digits are 0 9 and Wildcard Assign Users to list Available Users Selected Users 10 Add gt 1 12 Add All 13 LJ 14 15 Remove 15 17 lt lt Remove All 18 Mi IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 54 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings System Settings 3 2 1 3 Emergency Number List This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Create Calling Lists Emergency Number Lists This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting System List Management You can enter 10 emergency phone numbers into this list This list is applied to all users and overrides any dialing restrictions that may also be applied to the users By default 911 is already added to the emergency list and cannot be removed System List Management Allowed Lists Emergency List Telephone Numbers in list Disallowed Lists 28 Digit Number Emergency Number Lists 01 311 06 Account Code Entries 02 07 03 08 m
59. numbers IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 58 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings System Settings 3 2 3 License Management This menu cannot be accessed from the System 42 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 4 list by selecting System License Management This menu is used to enter licenses required for additional telephone system features For example licenses are used to enable additional voicemail ports Each license is a unique 32 character string based on the feature being licensed and the serial number of the SD card plugged into the system control unit It is recommended that you use the Import control to import licenses Alternatively the license keys can be cut and pasted into the Key field Entering licenses manually is liable to errors caused by miskeying of the correct 32 character string System License Management License Management Type Status Quantity Expiry Date Key e Import Import licenses from a CSV file Each line of the file should contain a license name and the 32 character license key each separated by a comma The name is not important as it is not imported e Export Export the licenses to a CSV file License Settings For each license key entered the following information is displayed e Key This is the 32 character license string e Type Information field not editable If the Key is rec
60. of the trunk e Domain Name Default Blank Each SIP Trunk configuration has a unique ITSP Domain name needed by SIP end points in order to register with the IP Office This is a string which may be directly resolved to an IP Address or may require DNS lookup to resolve the domain name to the Service provider s address If this field is left blank registration is against the LAN IP address e Authentication Name Default Blank This value is provided by the SIP ITSP e Password Default Blank This value is provided by the SIP ITSP e Number of Channels Default 10 Number of trunk channels between 1 and 24 e Transport Protocol Default Both TCP amp UDP Both TCP and UDP SIP end points are supported This field can be used to restrict the IP Office to just TCP or UDP if required e Send Port Default 5060 The port to use for outgoing call support e Listen Port Default 5060 The port to use for incoming call support e Advanced Setup Clicking on Advanced Setup 85 when an SIP Trunk line type is selected in the list and a domain name has been entered accesses a menu of additional settings IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 112 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks SIP Trunk Channel Setup e Channel Set by the system Shown for information only e Appearance ID Appearance ID numbers can be used to associate each channel a Line App
61. or external inbound 6 Called Number This is the number called by the IP Office For a call that is transferred this field shows the original called number not the number of the party who transferred the call e Internal calls The extension group or short code called e Inbound calls The DDI dialed by the caller if available e Outbound calls The dialed digits e Voice Mail Calls to a user s own voicemail mailbox 7 Dialled Number For internal calls and outbound calls this is identical to the Called Number above For inbound calls this is the DDI of the incoming caller 8 Account The last account code attached to the call Note IP Office account codes may contain alphanumeric characters 9 Is Internal O or 1 denoting whether both parties on the call are internal or external 1 being an internal call Calls to SCN destinations are indicated as internal Direction Is Internal Is Internal Call Type 1 0 Incoming external call Incoming external call Oo 1 Jnteralcal 0 O0 Outgoing external call 10 Call ID This is a number starting from 1 000 000 and incremented by 1 for each unique call If the call has generates several SMDR records each record will have the same Call ID Note that the Call ID used is restarted from 1 000 000 is the IP Office is restarted 11 Continuation 1 if there is a further record for this call id O otherwise 12 PartyiDevice The device 1 number This is usually th
62. prompts for all languages and all files for IP Office Web Manager Mobile Twinning No Longer Supported The mobile twinning features available in previous releases are no longer supported On existing systems upgraded to Release 8 0 the related settings such a Mobile Twin buttons are converted to Remote Call Forward during the upgrade Any licenses added for mobile twinning are retained but not used Customers wanting to use mobile twinning will need to upgrade to IP Office Essential Edition Call Screening This function is used to enable or disable call screening While enabled when a caller is presented to the user s voicemail mailbox if the user s phone is idle they will hear through the phone s handsfree speaker the caller leaving the message and can select to answer or ignore the call SIP Trunk Enhancements A number of features have been added for SIP trunk operation IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 9 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e Trunk Service Status Checking The system can regularly check the availability of a SIP trunk in order to ensure that outgoing calls are not delayed by attempting to use a trunk which is no longer in service e Call Routing Method Control Which part of the incoming call information should be used as the incoming number can now be selected The options are to match either the Request URI or the To Header e Associate Method Control The method
63. s extension before it is redirected to voicemail e For Release 6 1 the option O for immediate voicemail is available 0 is the only value usable for phantom extensions If selected it has the following effects e For a call that would have otherwise have alerted at the extension the call now goes immediately to voicemail e If the extension has call forwarding set the forwarded call will continue ringing at the forwarding target rather than going to voicemail e If the extension is the target for another extension s call forwarding the call will go immediately to the forwarding extension s voicemail e Intercom Dial Tone Default Regular This setting allows selection of which dial tone is used for intercom internal calls Regular matches the dial tone used by the phone system Machine matches the normal CO dial tone e Distinctive Ringing Default Active This setting is used for analog extensions only If active the phone will use if supported different ring patterns to indicate internal external and recall calls e Hotline Alert Number Default Blank If a number is entered here when the extension goes off hook by simply lifting the handset or pressing a speaker button rather than first selecting a line or intercom button this number is called e Privacy Enabled Default Off If off when connected to an external call on a particular line other users with a line appearance for that line are able to join that ca
64. selecting Trunks Outbound Call Handling ARS Selectors ARS selectors are used to create groups of available lines These can then be specified as the groups of line to be used for different types of external calls in the Dial Numbers Table 126 An available trunk in an ARS selector group can seized by dialing 8 followed by the ARS selector group number or using a line appearance 714 button configured for the ARS selector group number Modify ARS ARS Selectors Dial Numbers ARS Selector Table Selector Type Details 65 Group Of Lines Line Appearances 05 06 0 66 ISDN Standard Call Local Number Default 67 ISDN Number Withheld Local Number Number Withheld 68 SIP Call By Call Local URI 142354 69 Group Of Lines Line Appearances 01 02 03 Select Lines Available Lines Selected Lines D5 BRI Add 01 Analog DB5 BRI 02 Analog 07 BRI 03 Analog 08 BRI satel O4 Analog lt Remove Remove All e ARS Selector Table This table is used to edit and add ARS selectors A selector number can be dialed to seize a matching line by dialing 8XX where XX is the selector number required Selector numbers can also be assigned to line appearances 714 to make outgoing calls e Selector This must be a number in the range 65 to 99 Selectors 65 66 and 67 are used by default entries e 65 Group of Lines This entry cannot be deleted By
65. setup 99 DTMF 83 hold disconnect time 81 installed 80 line administration 80 parameters 83 99 PRI advanced 99 80 83 Page 214 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Trunk PRI advanced channel setup 101 SIP 111 T1 104 T1 advanced setup 108 109 VMS settings 83 Twinning 61 U UDP 164 performs 33 set 33 UDP Broadcast 35 UDP broadcast address 33 Under UDP Discovery 33 Unit Type 35 Unit Broadcast Address 161 Units data relating 35 Unlock 156 unvalidated 172 Upgrade Manager during 172 system during 172 Upgrade Wizard tool 172 User 63 User setup 61 V Validate Configuration 168 Validate option 172 Validating 168 Validation selecting 168 Visual selecting 165 Visual Preferences selecting 165 VMS 101 VMS Cover 156 VMS Cover Ring 72 VMS settings 81 Voice Mailbox Transfer 157 Voicemail 66 Voicemail Code 72 Voicemail Email 72 Voicemail Email Mode 72 Voicemail On Off 156 Ww Wake Up Service 145 158 Windows Registry editing 166 Windows Registry Settings Changing 166 Within Preferences 164 Working Directory 163 Z Zero Suppression 99 108 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Index Page 215 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 216 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Performance figures and data quoted in this document are typical and must be specifically confirmed in writi
66. that was used to lock that extension When the button is pressed the user is prompted to enter the number of the locked extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 22 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 937 4 34 VMS Cover A button set to this function allows the user to switch use of voicemail coverage for their extension on or off When on calls to the extension are redirected to the extension s mailbox when they ring unanswered for the extension s VMS Coverage Rings 724 setting When off calls to the extension continue to ring at the extension until answered or the caller hangs up If the feature is programmed onto a button with LEDS LCD it will indicate when the feature is active e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 15 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 984 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 156 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Button Programming Voice Mailbox Transfer 4 35 Voice Mailbox
67. the SD card and that becomes a permanent entitlement for the control unit However after 90 days the IP500v2 will require an upgrade license if upgraded to a software release higher than any that it has run in the initial 90 day period Ay Warning Systems upgraded without the appropriate license will display No license available and will not allow any telephony functions e SIP Trunk Channel Licenses The system can support 3 simultaneous SIP calls without needing licenses Additional simultaneous calls up to 20 in total require the addition of licenses 59 to the configuration e VCM Channels Note that for SIP calls the system also requires VCM channels For a IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system those are provided by installing IP500 Combination base cards Each of these cards provides 10 VCM channels IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 7 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e IP500 PRI Channel Licenses The IP500 PRI 1 trunk daughter card supports the use of its first 8 channels unlicensed Use of additional channels require licenses to be added to the configuration The maximum number of channels depends on the current Line Sub Type setting of the PRI trunk e Embedded Voicemail Additional Ports Unlicensed the Embedded Voicemail provided by the system supports 2 simultaneous connections and 15 hours of storage This can be expanded up to 6 channels by the addition of licenses
68. to the system s designated loudspeaker extension port Save Number Redial 156 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer Simultaneous Page 154 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to make a page call to both the loudspeaker extension and the extensions in first calling group 71 Hot Dial 154 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to turns hot dialing on or off When on the extension user is able to begin dialing without going off hook For ETR extensions hot dial is off by default For DS and TCM digital stations hot dial is on by default and cannot be changed Answering Calls Call Logl15 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to access the system call log The user must also be one of the 3 extensions configured for Log All Caller ID Calls for Users 48 gt Call Pickup 159 Action Data Extension number A button set to this function performs a call pickup from the target extension If the target has parked calls a parked call is retrieved in preference to any ring call at the target Extension users can park calls by transferring the call their own extension number Parked calls will recall after 3 minutes Caller ID Inspect 159 Action Data None When off hook on a call
69. usable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned This number is used to uniquely identify the telephone line or channel The number can be assigned to programmable buttons on extensions to allow the users to make and answer calls on that line or channel e Local Number Information only Use to any associated number for test calls to the line e Anonymous Default Off If selected withhold sending caller ID information on outgoing calls For PBX Mode systems this may also be invoked or overridden by the ARS selector used to route the call e Coverage Destination Default None System Mode Key System This option sets where incoming calls should alert in addition to alerting on those extension that have a line appearance button programmed for the line When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 77 group e None If set to None incoming calls will only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the line s Appearance ID e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 771
70. window e To filter displayed units type the first few characters of the unit name in the Filter field Any unit whose name does not match the filter will be temporarily hidden e Each discovery appends data to the known unit list It is possible that details of some entries in the list may be out of date Right clicking on the leftmost grey column of any row will bring up a floating menu offering the options of Refresh and Delete e Anew entry may be manually added without having to access the system first through normal discovery Enter the IP address of the new system in the IP Address column of the blank row shown with a and select Refresh from the floating menu This will update the Known Units file with data relating to the unit with the specified address e Select Cancel to return to the Select IP Office menu Note e The key used by the Known Systems CSV file is the IP address The file cannot contain entries for separate systems that use the same IP address for access IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 35 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e The file can be made read only In that case any attempts using Manager to update the file will be ignored IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 36 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application Known IP Office Discovery 2 5 Saving the Configuration The current config
71. without a programmable button press FEATURE and then dial 26 4 21 Hunt Group A button set to this function allows the user to call or page the hunt group represented by the button e If an extension already has a button set to this function and target creating another button with this function to the same target will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and then dial 77 and the hunt group number 1 to 6 The additional number 777 can be used for access to voicemail to collect messages e A page call that is auto answered by the first available extension in the hunt group can be selected by adding a in front of the hunt group number e This type of button can be used for one touch transfer 234 operation 4 22 Idle Line Pickup A button set to this function allows the user to seize a line if that line is idle This allows the user to access line for which they do not have a line appearance button on their extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press a call appearance button and then dial 8 followed by the two digit line number 4 23 Last Number Redial A button set to this function allows the user to redial the las
72. 1 FP1 Manager Page 69 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 3 1 2 System Programming Features This tab and its button functions are only for the first extension in the system These features are linked to the usage of the System Password 47 gt as they affect the operation of the phone system for all users and trunks T Set Button Programming Information Programming Features i Line Assignment Night Service Wake Up Service Blank e Night Service Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to switch night service on or off The System Password if set is required to use this feature When night service is on use and behavior of VMS on some trunks may change depending on the trunk configuration Also when night service is on users in the night service group 77 must first use the System Password to make outgoing external calls other than emergency calls If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Wake Up Service Action Data None Software level 6 1 It allows the user to set an alarm call to occur another extension in the next 24 hours When the alarm occurs if the call is answered the targeted user will hear music on hold if available otherwise they hear repeated tones If the call is not answered another attempt is made 5 minutes later however only 2 attempts are made Only one alarm can be set against each user at a
73. 15 2012 Index NET2 29 A Abbreviated Ringing 72 Absent Message 148 access 161 Account code entries Account Code Entry Button 148 Active Line Pickup 148 Administration analog trunks 81 compiling user lists 52 PC 26 PRI channel 96 PRI trunks 96 SIP trunk lines 111 system licenses 59 T1 trunks 104 Administrator rights 166 Advanced parameters 99 101 102 108 109 116 Advanced button 166 Alert 72 Alert Notification 145 154 Allowed calls 53 Allowed list 52 allows sorting list 163 ALS Programming 63 Appearance ID 96 104 Applications DVD 29 52 56 Ask 168 Audit Trail include 39 Auto attendant setup 132 Auto Dial Intercom 148 Other 148 Automatic VMS Cover 72 Automatically Saving Sent Configurations 39 Auxiliary equipment setup 127 Available column 172 Avaya IP shows 181 B Backup File Extension 166 Backup Files on Send 161 BAK 166 BOOTP matching 161 BOOTP Entries 161 Broadcast IP Address 164 Button Functions 144 Message Alert Notification Programming 144 Button programming 63 Buttons 63 C Cable RJ45 26 Call 145 154 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Index diverts 130 features 66 splitting 130 Call by Call table 111 Call Coverage 149 Call Coverage Ring 72 Call Forwarding 149 Call Pickup 150 Call Waiting Extension 72 Caller ID 48 logging 48 Caller ID Inspect Button 150 Name Display Button 150 Caller ID Log 150 Calling
74. 2 Range Up to 3 digits During impedance testing once the system has seized a line it dials this digit or digits to the line In some cases it may be necessary to use a different digit or digits For example if analog trunk go via another PBX system or Centrex it will be necessary to use the external trunk dialing prefix of the remote system plus another digit for example 92 e Automatic Balance Impedance Match These controls can be used to test the impedance of a line and to then display the best match resulting from the test Testing should be performed with the line connected but the phone system otherwise idle To start testing click Start The phone system will then send a series of signals to the line and monitor the response repeating this at each possible impedance setting Testing can be stopped at any time by clicking Stop When testing is complete Manager displays the best match and asks whether that match should be used for the line If Yes is selected Manager asks whether the match should be applied to all other analog lines provided by the same analog trunk card or module To conform with the Receive Objective Loudness Rating at distances greater than 2 7km from the central office on the analogue trunks a receive gain of 1 5 db needs to be added IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 83 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Ring Persistency Defau t 400ms Range 0 to 2550ms Th
75. 288 is dialed the 10 is removed and 288 is placed in the calls TNS and NSF information fields IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 102 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks Special e Short code The number which results from the application of the rules specified in the User or System Short code tables and the Network Selection table and the Call by call table to the number dialed by the user e Number The number to be dialed to line e Special Default No Operator The available options are No Operator Local Operator or Presubscribed Operator e Plan Default National The available options are National or International An example set of settings would be 011N N No Operator International 010N N Local Operator International O1N N Local Operator National OON N Presubscribed Operator National ON N Presubscribed Operator National 1N 1N No operator National Call By Call Settings in this tab are only used when calls are routed via a channel which has its Service set to Call by Call It allows short codes to be created to route calls to a different services according to the number dialed Call By Call reduces the costs and maximizes the use of facilities Call By Call chooses the optimal service for a particular call by including the Bearer capability in the routing decision This is particularly useful when there are limited resources e Short Code
76. 3 Enable Time Server Enable BootP and TFTP Servers Enable Port For Serial Communication Enter Port Number To Be Used For Serial Communication Auto Connect on start up N Set Simplitied View as default Default to Standard mode e Edit Services Base TCP Port Default On This field shows or hides the Service Base TCP Port setting e Service Base TCP Port Default 50804 Access to the configuration and security settings on an IP Office 3 2 system requires Manager to send its requests to specific ports This setting allows the TCP Base Port used by Manager to be set to match the TCP Base Port setting of the IP Office system The IP Office system s TCP Base Port is set through its security settings e Enable Time Server Default On This setting allows Manager to respond to time requests from IP Office systems e Enable BootP and TFTP Servers Default On This setting allows Manager to respond to BOOTP request from IP Office systems for which it also has a matching BOOTP entry It also allows the IP Office to respond to TFTP requests for files IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 161 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e Enable Port for Serial Communication Not used This is a legacy feature for some older control units that were managed via the serial port rather than the LAN e Enter Port Number to be used for Serial Communication Used with the setting above to indicate
77. 45 Create an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode configuration by selecting from a menu of hardware options That configuration can then be saved as a file on the PC or uploaded to a system e Open Configuration from System 3 Restarts the process used by Manager to locate an IP Office system and load its configuration e Read a Configuration from File Load a configuration that has been saved as a file on the PC Manager can be switched from simplified view to advanced view by selecting View Advanced View The advanced view is not normally used with IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems and so is not covered by this manual Whether Manager uses simplified view or advanced view when it has no configuration loaded is set by the Manager preferences 16 setting Set Simplified View as default IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 40 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application Simplified View 2 9 Advanced View This view is used by IP Office Manager for the administration of standard IP Office systems It is not used for the administration of IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems ian Avaya IP Office R7 Manager File Edit View Tools Help i2o EEN IP Offices R soor 12 qvz Operator 3 Error List Confi Ite Record Description If Manager is running in this mode you can return to simplified view by selecting View Simplifie
78. 46 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 140 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Advanced Parameters e Binding Refresh Time seconds Default 0 Never Range 0 to 3600 seconds Having established which TCP UDP port number to use either through automatic or manual configuration the phone system can send recurring SIP Options requests to the remote proxy terminating the trunk Those requests will keep the port open through the firewall Requests are sent every x seconds as configured by this field If a binding refresh time has not been set you may experience problems receiving inbound SIP calls as they are unable to get through the Firewall In these circumstances make sure that this value has been configured e Public IP Address Default 0 0 0 0 This value is either entered manually or discovered by the Run STUN process If no address is set the phone system IP address is used e Public Port Default 0 This value is either entered manually or discovered by the Run STUN process e Run STUN This button tests STUN operation between the phone system and the STUN Server IP Address set above If successful the results are used to automatically fill the remaining fields with the discovered values Before using Run STUN the SIP trunk must be configured IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 141 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday Oc
79. 68 42 1 192 168 48 1 the Select IP Office menu see Setting the Discover Address 33 DER Type Version IP 401 NG 3 0 100 IP406DS 3 2 24 TCP Discovery Progress Unit Broadcast Address 255 255 255 255 v Refresh Cancel Known Units IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 31 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 d If no system is found or an invalid name and password are used then the Manager simplified view 404 Welcome menu is displayed Va Avaya IP Office R7 Manager Eile Edit View Help WELCOME to IP Office Administration What would you like to do Create an Offline Configuration Open Confiquration from System Read a Configuration from File IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 32 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application Starting Manager 2 3 Setting the Discovery Addresses By default when amp or File Open configuration is selected Manager s Select IP Office menu appears It performs a UDP broadcast to the address 255 255 255 255 This broadcast will only locate IP Office systems that are on the same network subnet as the PC running IP Office Manager Select IP Office IP Address Type Version Version 3 0 CI wGc_G150 192 168 42 1 IP401NG 3 0 100 Version 3 2 C IP406 V2 192 168 48 1 IP406DS 32 24 lt TCP Discovery Progres
80. 8 This type of base card provides 8 TCM ports for the connection of Avaya Nortel digital stations Maximum 4 cards supported IP500 Trunk Daughter Cards Each IP500 base card supported by IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode can be fitted with an IP500 trunk daughter card on IP500 Combination cards the trunk daughter card is pre fitted and cannot be changed The following IP500 trunk daughter cards are supported by IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode Note that PRI and BRI trunks are not supported in the same system Analogue Trunk Card ATM 4 UNI This type of trunk daughter card allows the base card to which it is fitted to support up to 4 analog trunk connections ISDN BRI Trunk Cards BRI 4 UNI and BRI 8 UNI These type of trunk daughter cards allow the base card to which they are fitted to support ISDN BRI trunks The card is available in 2 trunk 4 channel and 4 trunk 8 channel variants This type of card is not supported in North American locales The IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system is limited to one ISDN trunk card per system A combination of cards is supported so long as no more than 12 channels are installed ISDN PRI Trunk Card PRI 1 UNI This type of trunk daughter card allows the base card to which it is fitted to support PRI trunks The type of PRI trunk E1 PRI US PRI or T1 is determined by the system locale Note that the channels supported by the card require licenses entered into the system configuration Th
81. 81 5 2 3 Advanced View sese e 181 5 2 4 Hide Admin Tasks ssssssssssss 181 52 59 TF TP E695 uie er HR esee es 181 5 3 TOONS inni t ese aati 182 5 3 1 Extension Renumber eese 182 5 3 2 Import Templates ssssssssssss 182 5 4 Embedded File Management sssusse 183 5 4 1 Open File Settings 184 Page 3 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 4 2 Close File Settings sssssssssss 184 5 4 3 Refresh File Settings 184 5 4 4 Upload File inerte ee 184 5 4 5 Upload System Files sssssssse 184 5 4 6 Backup System Files 184 5 4 7 Restore System Files sssusss 184 5 4 8 Upgrade Binaries ssssssssssss 184 5 4 9 Upgrade Configuration 184 5 4 10 Upload Voicemail Files 185 5 4 11 Copy System Card 185 5 4 12 Configuration sss 185 6 Appendix SMDR 6 1 SMDR Fields esses 188 6 2 SMDR Examples sese 191 7 Other System Administration Tools 7 1 Phone Based Administration esee 208 Ilidexe teorie tut UMIDHoIS peers M ner tU MIETEN ELO 211 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 4 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Chapt
82. 900 1 4001 390664 0 1000019 1 E22 Extn22 T9001 Line 1 1 6 0 0 n nr 2008 08 01 15 23 46 00 00 00 3 22 0 23 23 1 1000020 0 E22 Extn22 E23 Extn23 0 0 oo s n rrr 2008 08 01 15 23 37 00 00 04 4 01707299900 1 4001 390664 0 1000019 0 E23 Extn23 T9001 Line 1 1 0 0 p n nr rrr Busy Number Unavailable Tone In this example 2122 calls 2123 who is set to DND without voicemail This results in 2122 receiving busy tone The record shows a call with a Connected Time of 0 The Call Number field shows 2123 as the call target but the Party 2 Device and Party 2 Name fields show that the connection is to a virtual device 2008 07 09 17 59 00 00 00 0 2122 0 2123 2123 1 1000033 0 E2122 Extn2122 V8000 U1 0 0 0 0 Call Pickup The first record shows a call from 2122 to 2124 with a Connected Time of zero but a Ring Time of 8 The Continuation field indicates that the call has further records The second record has the same Call ID but the Party 2 Device and Party 2 Name details show that the call has been answered by 2121 2008 07 09 18 00 00 00 00 8 2122 0 2124 2124 1 1000038 1 E2122 Extn2122 E2124 Extn2124 0 0 2008 07 09 18 00 00 00 38 1 2122 0 2124 2124 1 1000038 0 E2122 Extn2122 E2121 Extn2121 0 0 Park and Unpark Parking and unparking of a call at the same extension is simply shown by the Park Time field of the eventual SMDR record Similarly calls held and unheld at the same extension are shown by the Held Time field of the eventu
83. AVAYA IP Office Basic Edition IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Issue 05g 0 Monday October 15 2012 2012 AVAYA All Rights Reserved Notices While reasonable efforts have been made to ensure that the information in this document is complete and accurate at the time of printing Avaya assumes no liability for any errors Avaya reserves the right to make changes and corrections to the information in this document without the obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes Documentation disclaimer Avaya shall not be responsible for any modifications additions or deletions to the original published version of this documentation unless such modifications additions or deletions were performed by Avaya End User agree to indemnify and hold harmless Avaya Avaya s agents servants and employees against all claims lawsuits demands and judgments arising out of or in connection with subsequent modifications additions or deletions to this documentation to the extent made by End User Link disclaimer Avaya is not responsible for the contents or reliability of any linked Web sites referenced within this site or documentation s provided by Avaya Avaya is not responsible for the accuracy of any information statement or content provided on these sites and does not necessarily endorse the products services or information described or offered within them Avaya does not guarantee that these li
84. Display VM Locales 17 option 5 1 6 4 Receive Config This command displays the Select IP Office menu used to receive an IP Office systems configuration settings Once the configuration has been received you are prompted to save it on the PC IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 169 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 7 Advanced 5 1 7 1 Erase Configuration This command returns the configuration settings of an IP Office system back to their default values It also resets the user name and password for configuration access back to Administrator and Administrator When this command is used the Select IP Office menu is displayed Once an IP Office system is selected a valid user name and password are required to complete the action This command can also be performed from either of the first two extensions in the system using the Restart Defaults command see Phone Based Administration 208 5 1 7 2 Reboot When this command is used the Select IP Office menu is displayed Once an IP Office system is selected a valid user name and password are required The type of reboot can then be selected An immediate reboot can also be performed from either of the first two extensions in the system using the Reset Save All command see Phone Based Administration 208 Reboot Immediate When Free O Timed e Reboot If Manager thinks the changes made to the con
85. Group Button 150 Calling list 52 account code 56 allowed 53 disallowed 54 emergency 55 Cancel 168 Cancel button Selecting 35 Card SD 44 select 44 cause login 166 Manager 166 Certificate Offered IP Office 166 certificate store 166 cfg file ManagerPC 39 cfg files 39 Change password 47 system settings 48 Change Directory selecting 163 Change Working Directory 163 Changing 163 Initial 33 Initial Discovery Settings 33 TCP 161 Windows Registry Settings 166 Channel parameters 101 Channel setup 109 Channel Unit 99 108 Clock Quality 99 108 Close Configuration 161 Close Configuration Security Settings After 161 Close Configuration Security Settings After Send 161 Conference Drop 153 Configuration Saving 39 Configuration file 31 Configuration onto PC Saving 39 Configuration Received Saving 39 configuring Page 211 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 configuring Manager 35 Contact Closure 127 131 Button 153 Control unit 26 Copy 72 Copy and print 63 Coverage 66 Call Coverage Button 149 Coverage destination 81 96 104 CRC Checking 99 108 Create an offline configuration 44 CSU Operation 99 108 Current User Certificate Store 166 D data relating unit 35 Daylight saving 48 Default address 26 gateway 48 password 31 Delay 168 Delayed Ring 72 DESI label 63 Destination 132 Dial plan 99 111 Dialling 57 DID mapping 96 104 Directories selecting 163 Working 163 Dis
86. M YOU ARE INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO INTERCHANGEABLY AS YOU AND END USER AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS AND CREATE A BINDING CONTRACT BETWEEN YOU AND AVAYA INC OR THE APPLICABLE AVAYA AFFILIATE AVAYA Avaya grants End User a license within the scope of the license types described below The applicable number of licenses and units of capacity for which the license is granted will be one 1 unless a different number of licenses or units of capacity is specified in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Designated Processor means a single stand alone computing device Server means a Designated Processor that hosts a software application to be accessed by multiple users Software means the computer programs in object code originally licensed by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User whether as stand alone products or pre installed on Hardware Hardware means the standard hardware originally sold by Avaya and ultimately utilized by End User IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition License types Designated System s License DS End User may install and use each copy of the Software on only one Designated Processor unless a different number of Designated Processors is indicated in the Documentation or other materials available to End User Avaya may require the Designated Processor s to be identified by ty
87. Manager is running Commands may also be grayed out if not usable The following sections outline the functions of each command The Edit and Help menus are not included Simplified View These menu options are available when there is no configuration loaded in the Manager application File Open Configuration 16h Close Configuration Save Configuration Save Configuration As Preferences 165 Offline Send Config Advanced Erase Configuration Default 170 Reboot 176 System Shutdown 17h Upgrade 17 Switch to Standard Mode 175 Embedded File Management 17 Format IP Office SD Card 17 Recreate IP Office SD Card 17 Memory Card Command 17 amp Shutdown 178 Start Up 178 System Status 17 Add Display VM Locales 1781 View Toolbars 18 Tooltip 18h Advanced View 18 Hide Admin Tasks TFTP Log 185 Embedded File Management These menu options are available when IP Office Manager is switched to Embedded File Management 176 mode Open File Settings 1761 Close File Settings 176i Refresh File Settings 185 Upload File 176 Upload System Files 18 Backup System Files 1841 Restore System Files 184 Upgrade Binaries 184 Upgrade Configuration 1841 Copy System Card 18 Preferences 16 Configuration 16 Exit 180 Toolbars 18 Tiles 176 Icons 176i List 176 Details 1764 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 160 IP Office Basic E
88. Night Service Use this feature to program a button on the first extension on the system to turn night service on and off When night service is on all lines assigned to the telephones of the users in the night service group 77 ring immediately regardless of their normal line ringing settings Night service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours e You must program a Night Service Button on the first extension on the system e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during normal daytime operation e If you reassign the Night Service Button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned e If you program a System Password 484 you must enter the password when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 55 and marked system speed dial numbers without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after ho
89. Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system are ignored Enabling Template Support By default template support is not enabled To enable template support 1 Select File Preferences 2 Select the Visual Preferences tab 3 Select the Enable Template Options checkbox 4 Click OK Importing Templates Templates must be placed in the correct Manager Templates sub folder This can be done using the following command 1 Select Tools Import Templates in Manager 2 Browse to the current folder containing the templates that you want to import and select that folder 3 Click OK 4 Any template files in the folder will be copied to the correct Manager sub folder Copying a Trunk Template 1 Select Update Trunk Configurations or in Admin Tasks select Trunks 2 Click on the button at the left hand of an analog trunk to select it Then right click and select um Copy Settings from Template 3 Use the menu to select the template required Wa Template Type Selection Locale Country Service Provider C Display All Select Trunks to copy settings into Line Number Line Type 1 Analogue Trunk 2 Analoque Trunk 13 Analoque Trunk O4 Analogue Trunk Cancel 4 Select the trunks to which you want the template applied 5 Click Copy Settings IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 86 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks 3 5 2 BRI Trunk
90. S m amp S a5 gm AT amp T Specific Setup Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin TNS Codes Yes Yes Number ve s Spda Ye Ye DN o Short Code p wee q we s xe Number Yes ve See v o IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 206 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools ETSI PRI Trunk Settings Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Trunk Trunk Subtype L Xe E y ce i DEN i DV coversebesimton DMO mmppatem e Ye T1 Trunk Settings Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Trunk Parameters Clock Quality s Ys Framing Ye s cRCChecking O O e ve ZeroSuppression Ys ys csuoperation es w Line Signalling Ys Ys Haullensth esi ve Channel unit s Ys Inservice s ws Coverage Destination vw w Unique Line Ringing Ye ys WisDeay Day w w WMSDelay Night Ys ys wmsSchedue O w w VMS Auto Attendant Ys ys Type Settings Type Yes s Incoming Trunk Type w w Outgoing Trunk Type Ye w Rean vs ve TG vs
91. This copy is stored in Manager s Working Directory 163i using the IP Office s system name and cfg This behavior is controlled by the Backup File on Send File Preferences Security 164 option Saving a Configuration Received from an IP Office 1 Select File Save Configuration as from the menu bar Saving a Configuration opened on the PC 1 Click al in the main toolbar or select File Save Configuration from the menu bar 2 7 Loading a PC File Configuration files previously saved onto the PC can be reloaded into Manager Select File Offline Open File or from the default simplified view select Read a Configuration from File In order to send that configuration to a system the File Offline Send Config command must be used Ay A configuration created offline should only ever be loaded to a system with the matching hardware configuration Doing otherwise may cause system faults IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 39 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 2 8 Simplified View This is the default view displayed by Manager when it doesn t have a system configuration loaded r1 Avaya IP Office R7 Manager File Edit view Help WELCOME to IP Office Administration What would you like to do Create an Offline Confiquration Open Configuration from System Read a Confiquration from File The screen provides three main actions e Create an Offline Configuration 4
92. Transfer A button set to this function allows the user to transfer their current call to an extension s mailbox After pressing the button the current call is put on hold and the user can then enter the target extension number to indicate the mailbox required e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 157 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 4 36 Wake Up Service A Wake Up Service button can be assigned for the first extension in the system only Using this button the extension user can set wake up calls within the next 24 hour period for any other extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e Removing the wake up service button from the extension does not remove any existing wake up service alarms that have been set How the Wake Up Service Operates Using the button the extension can set a wake up call by specifying the target extension and the time e When the scheduled time is reach the system will make an intercom call to the target extension The call is indicate
93. able call appearance button Transfer return is not applied if the transfer is to a hunt group Outside Conference Denial Default Allowed When set to the Allowed more than one outside line can be added to a conference When set to the Disallowed a second outside line can not be added to a conference This feature does not change based on the type of outside line The intent of this feature is to minimize toll fraud For example if set to disallowed this would prevent someone from accepting an outside call at an extension conferencing in another outside party and then walking away allowing the two parties to converse Default Name Priority Default Favour Trunk Software level 8 0 For SIP trunks the caller name displayed on an extension can either be that supplied by the trunk or one obtained by checking for a number match in the system speed dials This setting determines which method is used by default For each SIP line this setting can be overridden by the line s own Name Priority setting if required e Favour Trunk Display the name provided by the trunk For example the trunk may be configured to provide the calling number or the name of the caller The system should display the caller information as it is provided by the trunk e Favour Directory Search for a number match in the system speed dials The first match is used and overrides the name provided by the SIP line If no match is found the name provided by the line i
94. ach channels can be used for a separate external call incoming or outgoing and can be represented by a line appearance button e For analog trunks each trunk supports just one call one channel e Advanced Setup This hot link option calls up a further window that is used to display and edit additional settings for the selected trunk and its trunk channels IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 81 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Analog Trunk Setup e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned This number is used to uniquely identify the telephone line or channel The number can be assigned to programmable buttons on extensions to allow the users to make and answer calls on that line or channel e Hold Disconnect Time Default 500ms Also known as Disconnect Clear or Reliable Disconnect This is a method used by the analog line provider to signal that the call has ended e Coverage Destination Default None System Mode Key System This option sets where incoming calls should alert in addition to alerting on those extension that have a line appearance button programmed for the line When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 77 group e None If set to None incoming calls will only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the line s Appearance ID e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension
95. aintenance of the systems e This functionality is not enabled by default It is controlled by the Enable Template Options setting in the Manager application preferences 165 e Trunk templates are used by different types of IP Office system Those template settings not supported by an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system are ignored Enabling Template Support By default template support is not enabled To enable template support 1 Select File Preferences 2 Select the Visual Preferences tab 3 Select the Enable Template Options checkbox 4 Click OK Importing Templates Templates must be placed in the correct Manager Templates sub folder This can be done using the following command 1 Select Tools Import Templates in Manager 2 Browse to the current folder containing the templates that you want to import and select that folder 3 Click OK 4 Any template files in the folder will be copied to the correct Manager sub folder Loading a SIP Trunk Template 1 Place the supplied template into the Manager application s Template sub folder by default C Program Files Avaya IP Office Manager Templates 2 In Admin Tasks select Trunks SIP Trunk Administration 3 Click on the button at the left hand of a trunk to select it Then right click and select New SIP Trunk from Template Alternatively click on the New SIP Trunk from Template icon top right 4 Use the menu to select the template required Wa Template T
96. al SMDR record for the call The records below however show a call parked at one extension and then unparked at another The records show a call from 17 to 13 13 then parks the call shown by the Park Time The call is unparked by 11 hence the first record is indicated as continued in its Continuation field The matching Call ID indicates the subsequent record for the call 2008 07 09 16 39 11 00 00 00 2 17 0 13 13 1 1000052 1 E17 Extn17 E13 Extn13 0 4 2008 07 09 16 39 11 00 00 02 0 17 0 13 13 1 1000052 0 E207 Extn17 E11 Extn11 0 0 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 192 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Appendix SMDR SMDR Examples Outgoing External Call The External Targeting Cause indicates that the external call was caused by a user The lack of specific reason implies that it was most likely dialed The External Targeter ID is the user name in this example a 16 23 06 00 00 04 5 13 0 9416 9416 0 1000035 0 E13 Extn13 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 Extn13 U Extn13 Rerouted External Call In this example an incoming external call has been rerouted back off switch shown by the Party 1 fields and the Party 2 fields being external line details The External Targeter Cause shows that rerouting of the incoming call was done by an incoming call route ICR The External Targeter ID in this case is the Tag set on the incoming call route The External Targeted Number is the actual ex
97. all e When a call moves from one device to another an SMDR record is output for the first part of the call and an additional SMDR record will be generated for the subsequent part of the call e Each of these records will have the same Call ID e Each record for a call indicates in the Continuation field if there will be further records for the same call e Wake up calls produce an SMDR record even if the intended extension was busy at the time of the call Party1 is shown as Wakeup Call Call Times e Each SMDR record can include values for ringing time connected time held time and parked time The total duration of an SMDR record is the sum of those values e The time when a call is not in any one of the states above for example when one party to the call has disconnected is not measured and included in SMDR records e Where announcements are being used the connected time for a call begins either when the call is answered or the first announcement begins e All times are rounded up to the nearest second e Each SMDR record has a Call Start time taken from the system clock time For calls being transferred or subject to call splitting each of the multiple SMDR records will have the same Call Start time as the original call IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 187 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 6 1 SMDR Fields The SMDR output contains the following fields Note that time va
98. allowed calls 54 discover IP Office 33 Discovery 164 Discovery Addresses 33 Distinctive Ringing 72 DNS 164 Do Not Disturb Button 153 Door phone 72 127 128 Drop 153 DTMF 81 DTMF Breakout 72 E Emergency calls 55 Enable Application Idle Timer 166 Enable BootP 161 Enable Port Serial Communication 161 Enable Time Server 161 Equipment Type 72 Ex directory 61 Exit Manager application 180 Export 57 59 Extension 61 alert 128 assign 128 enabling 131 users 61 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition F Fax Machine 72 File Directory Used 172 Filter 57 111 following Microsoft 166 Forward 72 Forwarding 149 Framing 99 108 Functions Button Programming 144 System Programming 208 G Gateway default 48 Greeting profiles 132 times 132 greyed 166 Group assignment 77 Calling 77 150 Hunt 77 154 management 77 night service 77 Pickup 77 155 H Handset 63 Hard disk 29 Haul Length 99 108 hide Service Base TCP Port 161 Hot Dial 154 Hotline Alert Number 72 Hunt Group Button 154 l Idle Line Pickup 154 Immediate 72 Import 57 59 Initial Changing 33 Initial Discovery Settings Changing 33 Install manager application 29 wizard 29 Installed hardware 48 Intercom Dial Tone 72 IP 164 IP address 26 48 IP Office admin applications 29 connect manager 26 installation 26 29 select window 31 IP Office File 163 IP Office Manager 6 1 161 IP Office System Dis
99. aming Default ESF Selects the type of signal framing used ESF or D4 CRC Checking Default On Turns CRC on or off Zero Suppression Default B8ZS Selects the method of zero suppression used B8ZS or AMI ZCS CSU Operation v CSU Operation F CPE v 0 115 ft v Foreign Exchange v Tick this field to enable the T1 line to respond to loop back requests from the line Line Signaling Default CPE The field can be set to either CPE Customer Premises Equipment or CO Central Office This field should normally be left at its default of CPE The setting CO is normally only used in lab back to back testing Haul Length Default 0 115 feet Sets the line length to a specific distance Channel Unit Default Foreign Exchange This field should be set to match the channel signaling equipment provided by the Central Office The options are Foreign Exchange Special Access or Normal IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 108 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks 3 5 3 3 2 T1 Advanced Channel Setup This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks This menu allows the adjustment of settings for each channel of the T1 trunk Trunks T1 Advanced Channel Setup Trunk Number 9 Channel
100. ant transfer Night Service Mode In both modes when the system is put into night service 2 all incoming calls except those to specific DID call mapping or SIP call by call destinations are rerouted to alert the users who are members of the night service group IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 14 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features Key System or PBX System 1 2 2 1 Coverage Destination Summary The table below summarizes the supported destinations for coverage destinations The options depend on the trunk type and the operating mode of the system Coverage Destinations Key Mode PBX EESTI ETSI T1 PRI f K lt oe PRI 1 None 4y If set to None incoming calls will only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the line s Appearance ID Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 22 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 775 Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 77 Calling Group F
101. are Upgrade Licenses Existing systems being upgraded to IP Office Release 7 0 will require an upgrade license e New IP500v2 Systems For the first 90 days a new IP500v2 control unit will run any supported IP Office Release without requiring an upgrade license The highest level run is written into the system s memory not the SD card and that becomes a permanent entitlement for the control unit However after 90 days the IP500v2 will require an upgrade license if upgraded to a software release higher than any that it has run in the initial 90 day period Ay Warning Systems upgraded without the appropriate license will display No license available and will not allow any telephony functions e SIP Trunk Channel Licenses The system can support 3 simultaneous SIP calls without needing licenses Additional simultaneous calls up to 20 in total require the addition of licenses 59 to the configuration e VCM Channels Note that for SIP calls the system also requires VCM channels For a IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system those are provided by installing IP500 Combination base cards Each of these cards provides 10 VCM channels e IP500 PRI Channel Licenses The IP500 PRI 1 trunk daughter card supports the use of its first 8 channels unlicensed Use of additional channels require licenses to be added to the configuration The maximum number of channels depends on the current Line Sub Type setting of the PRI trunk e Embedded Voicemail A
102. ary files used by the IP Office control unit and external expansion modules e It copies the firmware files used by phones supported by the system e For systems configured to running in IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER Mode or IP Office Basic Edition Norstar Mode mode the files for IP Office Web Manager are copied e For systems configured to run Embedded Voicemail the Embedded Voicemail prompts for those supported languages set as the system locale user locales incoming call route locales and short code locales are upgraded In addition the English language prompts are upgraded as follows IP Office A Law Norstar SD Cards UK English IP Office U Law PARTNER SD Cards US English 5 4 6 Backup System Files When selected Manager copies the folders and files from the System SD card s primary folder to its backup folder Any matching files and folders already present in the primary folder are overwritten 5 4 7 Restore System Files When selected Manager copies the folders and files from the System SD card s backup folder to its primary folder Any matching files and folders already present in the backup folder are overwritten e WARNING After this command the system will reboot The reboot will end all calls and services in progress 5 4 8 Upgrade Binaries This command is available for systems that have an System SD card and Optional SD card installed When this command is selected a
103. atch is found the call is routed to the Operator group The table is applied to all channels e DID Number If the incoming DID of a call on the trunk matches the DID set here it will be routed to this destination The system supports up to 4 digits DID additional digits after the first 4 are ignored Leave blank if only CLI matching is required e Incoming CLI If the incoming caller number on the trunk matches the Incoming CLI set here it will be routed to this destination Leave blank if only DID matching is required e Destination When this field is selected the drop down list allows selection of the destination for matching calls The options differ depending on whether the system s System Model 484 is set to Key System or PBX System e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Model 4 set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 77 gt e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Groupi 7 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox num
104. ate sent by IP Office is accepted if it has previously been previously saved in the Windows certificate store Any other certificate causes a log in failure e Certificate Offered to IP Office Default none Specifies the certificate used to identify Manager when the Secure Communications option is used and IP Office requests a certificate Use the Set button to change the selected certificate Any certificate selected must have an associated private key held within the store e Select from Current User certificate store Display certificates currently in the currently logged in user store e Select from Local Machine certificate store e Remove Selection do not offer a Manager certificate IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 167 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 5 6 Validation This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Validation sub tab By default Manager validates the whole configuration when it is loaded and individual fields whenever they are edited This tab allows selection of when automatic validation should be applied to configuration files loaded into Manager Validation Validate configuration on open C validate configuration on edit Prompt fc e Validate configuration on open Automatically validate configuration files when they are opened in Manager e Validate configuration on edit Validate the whole configuration when OK is cli
105. ation rights e Backup Files on Send Default On If selected whenever a copy of a configuration is sent to an IP Office system a backup copy is saved in IP Office Manager s working directory 163 The file is saved using the system name date and a version number followed by the Backup File Extension as set below This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights e Backup File Extension Default BAK Sets the file extension to use for backup copies of system configurations generated by the Backup Files on Send option above e Number of Backup Files to keep Default Unlimited Software level 4 24 This option allows the number of backup files kept for each system to be limited If set to a value other then Unlimited when that limit would be exceeded the file with the oldest backup file is deleted e Enable Application Idle Timer 5 minutes Default Off Software level 4 1 When enabled no keyboard or mouse activity for 5 minutes will cause the Manager to grey out the application and re request the current service user password This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights e Secure Communications Default Off Software level 4 1 When selected any service communication from Manager to IP Office uses t
106. attendant coverage VMS Schedule can also be varied depending on whether the system is in night service or not IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 13 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 PBX Mode In PBX mode a new group the Operator Group is used as a the default destination for call This group contains the first extension on the system e For analog trunks trunks the trunk s Coverage Destination is defaulted to the Operator Group but can be changed if required e For PRI and BRI trunks all incoming call routing is done by DID Call Mapping Each DID table has a non removable default route which is used for any calls that do not match any other specific DID entry The destination for this default entry is the Operator Group e SIP trunks are defaulted to call by call operation again with a default call by call destination of the Operator Group The following new destinations for incoming calls are available e Operator Group This group is the default destination for all incoming calls The group contains the first extension on the system but can be edited to contain other extensions e Calling Groups In Key mode these 4 groups are only used internally In PBX mode these groups are also available as a destination for trunk calls in the Coverage Destination selections DID Call Mapping and SIP Call by Call tables A calling group can also be selected as the destination for an auto attend
107. b Manager Note that the names of some features vary depending on which tool is being used for administration System Maintenance Functions Function IP Office IP Office Phone Based System Manager Web Admin Status Manager Application System Discovery Launch System Status Onboarding Global Registration Offline Create Configuration File Configuration Save Configuration as File Load Configuration from File Erase Configuration Default dic gt 8 F 3 s lt u g NE a r2 U lt V D ahili lt Z a lt O 5 8 S o o N M o zh Default Security Settings Reboot Warning Reboot Immediate Reboot When Free Reboot At Set Time System System Shutdown Indefinite Shutdown System Shutdown Timed NE NENNEN S X System Remote Software Upgrade pu Ew Cae ENS ERE ERR Card E Paina Ce i aE ce D es Do Backup tosyetomsD xe e e Ds X Restore tromsystemsD ves ves Ye es System Copy to Optional sD card ve ves veo a Feature KeyNumber ve ve e IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 195 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Installed Hardware prec ilb ee Trunk Analog Trunk Templates WE CHNENE KENNEN TEE EE NN IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 196 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday Octo
108. b Manager to manage the IP Office system into which the card will be loaded 7 Manager will start creating folders on the SD card and copying the required files into those folders 8 Do not remove the card until the process is completed and Manager displays Ready in the status bar IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 177 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 7 9 Memory Card Command These commands are used with the memory cards installed in the control unit s System SD and Optional SD card slots These command can also be performed from either of the first two extensions in the system see Phone Based Administration 208 5 1 7 9 1 Shutdown This command can be used to shutdown operation of IP500v2 memory cards This action or a system shutdown 174 must be performed before a memory card is removed from the unit Removing a memory card while the system is running may cause file corruption For IP500v2 systems shutting down the memory card will disable all services provided by the card including Embedded Voicemail For IP500v2 systems features licensed by the memory card will continue to operate for up to 2 hours Card services can be restarted by either reinserting the card or using the Start Up 17 8 command 5 1 7 9 2 Start Up This command can be used to restart operation of an IP500v2 memory card that has been shut down 178 The command will start the Select IP Office discover
109. ber 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools System Settings Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin System Yes Yes Parameters Yes lt es lt vV lt es lt es es lt es lt es es Yes Yes lt lt Uu lt uU lt lt Uu lt lt Uu System Speed Dials lt lt lt Advanced lt lt Uu lt lt lt uU STUN Settings for Enable STUN Network lt lt SMTP Server Configuration Sub NetMask OoOo Handling L ye vp e sj Import L wes o o Export See a DE Y E ese p xm cs Import Er xu a Export NET GNE Sey Enable STUN O Pot IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 197 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Busy Tone Yes Yes Detection Single Frequency Yes Yes Dual Frequency ves vs 7 y On Width s Ys o o Yes Yes IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 198 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools User Settings Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin User Settings Yes Yes Yes lt oO es S es lt D es S lt M lt oO es S lt oO Outgoing Call Bar es S lt oO Call Forwarding es S lt D
110. ber and passcode e 76 Modem For Release 6 1 the option 76 Modem can be selected to route the call to the systems built in V32 modem 234 function This is intended for basic configuration access by system maintainers e Auto Attendant For Release 6 1 any of the configured voicemail auto attendants can be selected as the call destination IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 95 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 3 2 PRI Trunks This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks If a PRI trunk with the Line Subtype of PRI is selected in the list of installed trunks its settings are displayed below the list of installed trunks Clicking on Advanced Setup 99 when a PRI line type is selected accesses a menu of additional settings for the trunk and settings for the trunks individual channels e IP500 PRI Channel Licenses The IP500 PRI 1 trunk daughter card supports the use of its first 8 channels unlicensed Use of additional channels require licenses to be added to the configuration The maximum number of channels depends on the current Line Sub Type setting of the PRI trunk Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Card Module Number of Channels Analog Trunk 1 2 Analog Trunk 2 PRI 24 Univ Advanced Setup PRI Trunk Channel Setup Uni
111. bership Assignment table below Group Memberships Information field not editable This field shows a summary of the hunt groups pickup groups and calling groups to which the user belongs If the user is selected these can be edited in the Membership Assignment table below Membership Assignment This section allows the calling list and group memberships of the currently selected user to be edited The Type option is used to select either List or Group memberships e List 524 If List is selected the list of lists that exist and the lists of which the user is a member are displayed Group 773 If Group is selected the list of groups that exist and the groups of which the user is a member are displayed IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 62 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup 3 3 1 Button Programming This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Configure User Button Programming This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 4 list by selecting User Setup Button Programming Most Avaya phones have programmable buttons to which a variety of functions can be assigned This menu can be used to edit the button settings It can also be used to adjust the automatic line selection 65 order used by the phone e Note that for systems running in Key System 49 mode a number of each users programmable buttons are automatically con
112. button e On 1400 Series phones a list of conference parties is displayed from which the user can select which call to drop e On ETR phones the last added external party is dropped e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 06 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 934 4 17 Contact Closure 1 A button set to this function allows the user to operate the system s contact closure 1 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 41 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 9 41 4 18 Contact Closure 2 A button set to this function allows the user to operate the system s contact closure 2 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 42 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 9 42 4 19 Do Not Disturb Use this feature to be able to press a programmed button to prevent incoming calls for the exten
113. by IP500 base cards DS8 and Combo DS6 P2 They can also use the DS ports provided by Digital Station 16 and Digital Station 30 external expansion modules e Avaya 1400 Series 1403 1408 and 1416 e Avaya 9500 Series 9504 and 9508 e Avaya TCM Digital Stations These phone use ports provided by the IP500 TCMS base card or by DS16A DS30A external expansion modules e Avaya M Series MT7100 MT7100N MT7208 MT7208N M7310 M7310N M7324 and M7324N e Avaya T Series 77000 T7100 T7208 T7316 T7316E e Other Phones Avaya 4100 Series Avaya 7400 Series and Audio Conferencing Unit ACU e Additional programmable buttons are supported by the addition of button modules on M7324 and T7316E phones e Avaya ETR Phones Avaya ETR Enhanced Tip and Ring phones are supported on both Avaya PARTNER ACS telephone systems and IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems On IP Office systems they connect to ETR ports provided by IP500 ETR6 base cards e ACS Refreshed Series ETR6D ETR18D ETR34D e ACS Euro Series ETR6 ETR18 ETR18D ETR34D e Avaya DECT Phones 3920 This DECT phone consists of a paired base station and cordless handset It connects to ports provided by the IP500 ETR6 base card Supported in North America only e Analog Phones The IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system supports DTMF analog phones These connect to PHONE extension ports provided by IP500 base cards Phone 2 Phone 8 and Combo DS6 P2 or external expansi
114. by which the system associates a incoming SIP call with a particular SIP trunk can be configured e Fax Transport Support Support for fax calls can be enabled if also supported by the line provider G711 and or T38 fax support can be selected e PRACK 100 rel Support This feature is sometimes called early media support and allows features such as in band call tones and call progress announcements to be played while the call connection process is still in progress IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 10 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features What s New in Release 8 0 1 2 Key System or PBX System For IP Office Release 7 0 the operating mode of a system can be changed Two modes are supported key mode and PBX mode The selected mode affects a number of controls mainly around the making of outgoing calls and the routing of incoming calls 1 2 1 Outgoing Call Routing Key Mode Each phone is configured with 2 Intercom buttons which cannot be changed It is also configured with line appearance buttons for specific lines using the Number of Lines settings and individual button programming e Internal calls are made by selecting one of the two Intercom buttons provided on each phone and then dialing the number of another extension or of the system feature required e External calls are made by selecting one of the line appearance buttons programmed on the phone and then diali
115. c Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 5 3 Discovery This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Discovery sub tab These settings affect the Select IP Office menu used by Manager to discovery IP Office systems By default IP Office 3 2 systems respond to both UDP and TCP discovery Pre 3 2 IP Office systems only support UDP discovery Preferences Directories Discovery visual Preferences Security Validation TCP Discovery NIC IP NIC Subnet Lower IP Range Upper IP Range 192 168 0 2 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 254 IP Search Criteria 192 168 0 1 192 168 0 254 LIDP Discovery Enter Broadcast IP Address 255 255 255 255 C Use DNS SCN Discovery e TCP Discovery Default On This setting controls whether Manager uses TCP to discover IP Office systems Only IP Office 3 2 and higher systems can respond to TCP discovery The addresses used for TCP discovery are set through the IP Search Criteria field below e NIC IP NIC Subnet This area is for information only It shows the IP address settings of the LAN network interface cards NIC in the PC running Manager Double click on a particular NIC to add the address range it is part of to the IP Search Criteria Note that if the address of any of the Manager PCs NIC cards is changed the Manager application should be closed and restarted e IP Search Criteria This tab is used to enter TCP addresses to be
116. can be used to switch the output of SMDR on or off e IP Address Default 0 0 0 0 Listen The destination IP address for SMDR records e TCP Port Default 0 The destination IP port for SMDR records e Record to Buffer Default 500 Range 10 to 3000 The phone system can buffer up to 3000 SMDR records if it detects a communications failure with destination address When the buffer is full each new record overwrites the oldest record e Call Splitting for Diverts Default Off When enabled for calls forwarded off switch using an external trunk the SMDR produces separate initial call and forwarded call records This applies for calls forwarded by forward unconditional forward on no answer or forward on busy The two sets of records will have the same Call ID The call time fields of the forward call record are reset from the moment of forwarding on the external trunk IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 130 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Auxiliary Equipment 3 6 4 Contact Closure Group This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Setup Auxiliary Equipments This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 43 list by selecting Auxiliary Equipment The phone system has two ports which can be connected to external relay systems for example systems used to open doors You can configure which users are able to activate those ports and th
117. ce Manager and then restored after the card is recreated For the card to be used in a system s System SD slot the card must be Avaya SD Feature Key card The card must be correctly formatted see Format IP Office SD card 17 however a reformat of an existing working card is not necessary before using recreate to update the card contents e The source for the files copied to the SD card are the sub folders of the Memory Cards folder under IP Office Manager s Working Directory 163 normally C Program Files Avaya IP Office Manager However if the Working Directory is changed to a location without an appropriate set of Memory Cards sub folders the required set of files will not be copied onto the SD card 1 Note This process can take up to 20 minutes depending on the PC Once started the process should not be interrupted 2 Insert the SD card into a reader slot on the Manager computer 3 Using Manager select File Advanced Recreate IP Office SD Card 4 Select IP Office A Law or IP Office U Law This selection will affect how the IP Office system operates when defaulted with this card present in its System SD card slot The other options available are not used for a IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system 5 Browse to the card location and click OK 6 IP Office Manager will prompt whether you want to include Avaya IP Office Web Manager files as part of the recreate process Those files are necessary if you want to use IP Office We
118. ch auto attendant the system language setting can be overridden by the auto attendant s own Language 13 setting e Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server Default On When selected the telephone system acts as a DHCP client and will obtain its IP address details by making DHCP requests when started If not selected the telephone system uses the IP address set in the fields below IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 49 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e IP Address Default 192 168 42 1 Enter the IP address that the telephone system should use if Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server is not selected e Sub Net Mask Default 255 255 255 0 Enter the Sub Net Mask that the telephone system should use if Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server is not selected e Default Gateway Default 0 0 0 0 Enter the Default Gateway that the telephone system should use if Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server is not selected e Automatic Daylight Saving Time Default On When selected the telephone system will automatically apply daylight saving time adjustments to its internal clock This feature should only be used for systems in a North American locale e Language The default system language is normally set by the system s Country selection above indicated in brackets after the country name However this field can be used to change the system language if required When used it sets the language used fo
119. cked after editing a record For large configurations disabling this option removes the delay caused by validating the configuration after every edit e Prompt for configuration validation on save or send If selected when saving or sending a configuration a prompt is displayed asking whether the configuration should be validated If validation is selected and errors are found the send or save process is canceled This option is disabled if Validate configuration on edit is selected IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 168 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 1 6 Offline 5 1 6 1 Create New Config This command starts a menu that allows you to create an offline configuration 444 by specifying the system locales the type of IP Office control unit and expansion modules and the trunk cards fitted The same action is performed by the icon in the Main Toolbar 5 1 6 2 Open File This command allows a configuration file stored on PC to be opened in Manager 5 1 6 3 Send Config This command is used to send an offline configuration to an IP Office system e After sending the configuration you should receive the configuration back from the system and note any new validation errors shown by Manager For example if using Embedded Voicemail some sets of prompt languages may need to be updated to match the new configurations locale setting using the Add
120. command Working Directory cfg files C Program Files Avaya PO ffice M anager Binary Directory bin files C Program Filess amp vayaMP Office Manager Known Units File C Program Filess amp vayaMP Office anagersknownlP csv e e Working Directory cfg files Sets the directory into which Manager saves cfg files By default this is the Manager application s program directory e Binary Directory bin files Sets the directory in which the Manager upgrade wizard HTTP TFTP and BOOTP functions look for firmware files requested by phones expansion module control units and other hardware components That includes bin file scr files and txt files By default this is the Manager application s program directory e Note that in the Upgrade Wizard 175 right clicking and selecting Change Directory also changes this setting e Known Units File Software level 4 0 Q2 2007 maintenance release Sets the file and directory into which Manager can record details of the IP Office systems it has discovered Once a file location has been specified a Known Units 39 button becomes available on the discovery menu used for loading IP Office configuration Pressing that button displays the known units file as a list from which the required IP Office system can be selected It also allows sorting of the list and entries to be removed IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 163 IP Office Basi
121. covery 35 IP Office System Status 179 IP Office Technical Bulletins 172 IP Search Criteria 164 its 166 Page 212 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 K Key 59 Know System Discovery 35 Know Units 35 Known IP Office File 163 Known System Discovery 35 Known Systems CSV file 35 Known Units file 35 L Label printing 63 LAN 26 31 Language 48 61 Laptop 26 Large 168 Last Number Redial 154 LED 26 Line Active Line Pickup 148 assignment 71 Idle Line Pickup 154 perphone 71 subtype 96 104 Line Pickup Active 148 Idle 154 Line Signaling 99 108 Lines per phone 48 List account code 52 allowed 52 allows sorting 163 assignment 61 calling 52 disallowed 52 emergency 52 group 61 management 52 membership 61 Sorting 172 user 61 Loading IP Office 163 Local Machine Certificate Store 166 Locale 48 Lock 156 Log caller IDs 48 login cause 166 Loudspeaker Page 154 Loudspeaker Paging 72 M Mailbox Transfer 157 Main menu 160 Manager installing 29 preparing 26 select 31 start 31 Managing groups 77 manual editing 166 Menu commands 160 edit 160 file 160 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Index help 160 view 160 Message Alert Notification 145 154 Messaging 66 Microsoft following 166 Music on hold 127 129 N Name 61 Name Display 150 NIC 164 NIC IP NIC Subnet 164 Night service 70 77 No Ring 72 Notification 145 154 O offer Manager 166 offline send 169 Ope
122. ctor group numbers are also listed e Ringing Options Select whether the phone should provide audible alerting when a call is waiting to be answered on the line Not used for buttons assigned to ARS Selectors e Immediate Provide audible alerting as normal e Delayed Ring Only provide audible alerting after three rings 15 seconds e No Ring Do not provide any audible alerting e Blank When selected this option removes all programming from the button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 71 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 3 2 Advanced Settings This menu cannot be accessed from the System 42 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 4235 list by selecting User Setup Advanced Settings This menu is used to configure user settings User Setup Advanced Settings User Selection Base Card BD1 Select User 10 Ni Port I Advanced Parameters Ring Pattern 1 VMS Cover Ring 3 z Abbreviated Ringing Active w Intercom Dial Tone Regular v Call Coverage Ring 2 Distinctive Ring Active v Call Waiting Extension Not Assigned w Hotline Alert Number Automatic YMS Cover Assigned w Privacy Enabled O Transfer Return Extension Not Assigned v Override Line Ringing Voicemail Settings DTMF Breakout Voicemail Code Reception
123. current menu options greeting instead e Transfer to Greeting Software level 6 1 This option transfers the caller to a set of prompts for recording the emergency greeting and for selecting whether the emergency greeting is active or not e If a system password has been set the caller is asked to enter that password before they can continue e When the emergency greeting is active it is played to other auto attendant callers before any other auto attendant greeting e When the emergency greeting is active a warning is displayed on the auto attendant s Alarm Extension e Transfer to Number Transfer the call to the extension or group selected in the Destination field e Replay Greeting Repeat the current menu options greeting e Destination Sets the destination for the Transfer to Number action The drop down list can be used to select from the available extension and groups configured on the phone system This list contains an option to collect voicemail For Transfer to Auto Attendant allows selection of the target auto attendant e The option 76 Modem can be used to select the V32 modem supported by the first analog trunk This can be used for basic remote access for maintenance IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 136 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Auto Attendant Setup Recording Auto Attendant Greetings Dialing the appropriate number shown in the
124. d View Alternatively you can use the advanced view to load a configuration The Manager will automatically return to simplified view mode when an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode configuration is loaded IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 41 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 2 10 The System Page This is the default or home page when an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode configuration has been loaded into IP Office Manager It displays a summary of the system and a list of links for common configuration tasks ia Avaya IP Office R7 Manager 00E0070521A3 6 0 11046 Administrator Administrator File Edit View Help LS H Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration What would you like to do Please review the current IP Office Setup below Change Remote Administration Password o Hardware Installed Control Unit IP 500 V2 Change System Settings Internal Modules ETR6 DIGSTAS Unknown COMBO621 0 ATM4 Create Calling Lists Expansion Modules NONE Feature Key None Administer Speed Dial Serial Number 00e007052143 User Settings System Settings IP Address 192 168 0 3 Configure User Button Programming Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 System Locale United States US English Number assigned to first Extension 10 Administer Auto Attendant Number of Extensions on System 22 Features Confiqured Manage Hunt Groups Setup Auxi
125. d as a Wake Up Call in the display The wake up call will alert for approximately 30 seconds e Wake up calls ignore settings such as Do Not Disturb forwarding call coverage and coverage to voicemail e If the extension user is on a call e For an analog extension the wake up call is treated as unanswered e For other extensions the wake up call will alert with just an abbreviated ring e When a user answers a wake up call they hear music on hold if available otherwise they hear a repeated double tone e Once a wake up call is answered it is treated as being completed and no further call attempts are made e If the wake up call is not answered or the extension is busy the wake up call is rescheduled for 5 minutes later e Only 2 attempts are made to send a wakeup call If neither is answered the wake up call is cleared e If a wake up call is already scheduled for an extension setting up a new wake up call to that extension will erase the existing wakeup call e Wake up calls are shown in the SMDR output with the name Wake Up Call IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 158 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Chapter 5 Manager Menu Commands IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 159 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 Manager Menu Commands The commands available through the Manager menu bar change according to the mode in which
126. d to apply number translations to the digits received by the line for output to the line provider and to indicate any special service required from the line provider for example to withhold the call ID The default dial plan is as shown below Dialled Number Result Action ON ON jpDialLocal No N iat Local sa jui bee Ee a jDetoeh O an ew bee Son a bete S xe A C jeMAmnymosy Incoming Number Filter The default incoming number filter simply converts international USA numbers received into local 10 digit numbers However it is also useful for mapping PC calls from skype google windows etc into a dialable number plan One nice way to use this is to map PC calls into numbers in area code 555 e Incoming Number Used to match the incoming number received e Result The replacement for the incoming number e Include in Dial Plan When you select include in dial plan the system will automatically substitute the number you dial for outgoing calls as well IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 120 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 121 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 4 2 SIP Templates IP Office Manager can be used to import trunk settings from a template If you have multiple system using the same provider this may simplify configuration and m
127. da or Mexico locale e BRI trunk cards are not selectable for systems with a United States Canada or Mexico locale 8 Use the Expansion Modules box to select the expansion module if there are any attached to the system to which the configuration will be loaded 9 When the hardware selection is as required click OK 10 The configuration is now created and loaded into Manager for editing 11 Once this configuration has been edited as required it can be saved on the PC or sent to a system a To Save a Configuration File on the PC Use File Save Configuration b To Send the Configuration to a System If the system which you want to use the configuration is available use File Offline Send Configuration 16 to send the configuration to it e WARNING This action will cause the system to reboot and will disconnect all current calls and service e Ensure that you have a copy of the systems existing configuration before overwriting it with the off line configuration e After sending the configuration you should receive the configuration back from the system and note any new validation errors shown by Manager For example if using Embedded Voicemail some sets of prompt languages may need to be updated to match the new configurations locale setting using the Add Display VM Locales 17 option IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 45 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Chapter 3
128. dditional Ports Unlicensed the Embedded Voicemail provided by the system supports 2 simultaneous connections and 15 hours of storage This can be expanded up to 6 channels by the addition of licenses each of which enables an additional two channels For IP Office Release7 0 each license also enables an additional 5 hours of storage IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 60 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings System Settings 3 3 User Setup This menu is accessed from the System 421 page by selecting User Settings This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting User Setup This menu allows configuration of extension user settings Note that before an extension number indicates a phantom user i e one not matched by an actual extension Phantom users 24 can still be used for mailbox services and other features User Setup Configure User List Outgoing Extension Name Language Ex Directory User CLI Call Bar List Membership 10 English UK None 11 English UK None T2 English LK None 13 English UK None 14 English UK None Membership Assignment Type O List Group Available Groups Selected Groups Calling Groups 1 Operator Group 1 Calling Groups 2 Calling Groups 3 Calling Groups 4 HuntGroup 1 Add All gt gt HuntGroup 2 HuntGroup 3 HuntGroup 4 HuntGroup 5 lt Remove HuntGroup 6 Night Service Group
129. de 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 23 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 24 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Chapter 2 The Manager Application IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 25 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 2 The Manager Application IP Office Manager is a Windows PC application used to configure Avaya IP Office telephone systems This document covers the use of Manager with IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems to load edit and save the configuration of those systems The Configuration Settings 474 section covers details of the individual configuration settings accessible using IP Office Manager tai Avaya IP Office R7 Manager File Edit View Tools Help X Admin Tasks 44 Trunks zs Andian Equipment Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition QUICK Version Administrati What would you like to do Change Remote Administration Password Change System Settings Create Calling Lists Administer Speed Dial User Settings Configure User Button Programming Manage Hunt Groups Administer Auto Attendant Setup Auxiliary Equipments Update Trunk Configurations Please review the current IP Office Setup Internal Modules COMBOB210 ATM4 Expansion Modules NONE Feature Key NONE Serial Number 000000000000 System Settings IP Addre
130. de Entry button Voluntary account codes are recorded in the same way as forced account codes but are not validated System List Management Allowed Lists Account Code List i i Telephone Numbers in list Disallowed Lists elephone Numbers in lis Emergency Number Lists Number Account Code Account Code Entries Note 6 Digit Account Code Assign Users to list Available Users Selected Users 10 Add gt 11 12 Add All gt gt 13 J 14 15e Remove 15 17 lt lt Remove All 18 wv Using the Assign Users to List menu to add or remove users from the Selected User list will enable disable the Forced Account Code Entry 725 setting for the appropriate users IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 56 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings System Settings 3 2 2 Speed Dial Setup This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Administer Speed Dial This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 4235 list by selecting System Speed Dial Setup This menu allows you to configure names and numbers that can be accessed by dialing the associated speed dial code 600 to 699 System Speed Dial Setup Speed Dials Configured Filter Number Speed Dial Code 600 e For analog telephone devices when using last number redial saved number redial system speed dial and persona
131. de aT 9 Key PBX Expansion Modules Locale United States US English None Extension Number Length 2 i vi Nore Select Extension and Daughter Cards None Slot Extension VCM Trunk Combo DS6 P2 VCM10 ATM 4UNI v None ETRE PRI UNI v None None None None None None 3 Check that the Configuration setting is set to IP Office Quick Mode 4 Select the System Mode required The options are Key or PBX For more details see Key System or PBX System 11 e Key System The Number of Lines setting see below is used to automatically assign line appearance buttons on all extensions with programmable buttons To make external calls the user should select an available line appearance button Outbound call routing is determined by which line appearance button the user selects before dialing or by the user s automatic line selection 654 settings e PBX System No line appearances are automatically assigned The Outside Line setting see below is used to set the dialing prefix that indicates that the call is an external one for which an available line should be seized The Outbound Call Handling 124 settings are used to determine which lines are used for each outgoing call Line appearance buttons can also still be configured for making and answering external calls 5 Set the Locale to match the default locale and language that should be used for the system This will also affect the
132. dition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands 5 1 File Menu 5 1 1 Open Configuration This command displays the Select IP Office menu used to receive an IP Office systems configuration settings See Starting Manager 31 5 1 2 Close Configuration This command closes the currently loaded configuration without saving it 5 1 3 Save Configuration The File Save command saves the amended configuration If the configuration was received from an IP Office system the Send Config 374 menu is displayed If the configuration file was opened from a file on the PC 393 or created from new 445 the file is saved as a file on the PC 5 1 4 Save Configuration As The File Save As command allows you to save a configuration a file on the Manager computer The command displays the Save File As menu box You can enter the new file name including the drive and directory Configurations saved onto the PC in this way can be reopened 39 5 1 5 Preferences This command displays a menu for configuring various aspects of Manager s operation The menu is divided into a number of tabs Note that some of the preferences settings are not applicable when managing an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system 5 1 5 1 Preferences This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Preferences sub tab Preferences Edit Services Base TCP Port Services Base TCP Port 50804 Services Base HTTP Port 80
133. e Out OF Service None DID Mapping T able DID Number Incoming CLI Destination e Installed Trunks This table displays information about the trunk cards installed in the phone system Selecting a trunk in the list displays its trunk settings below the list e Line Number Information only not editable e Line Type Not Editable This value indicates the type of trunk The menu fields and sub menus will vary depending on the Line Type e Line Subtype For North American locales the Line Subtype of PRI trunks is set to either PRI or T1 The setting used should match the service supported by the line provider e Card Module Indicates the card slot or expansion module being used for the trunk device providing the line 1 to 4 match the slots on the front of the phone system from left to right Expansion modules are numbered from 6 upwards e Number of Channels The number of channels supported by a trunk depends on the Line Type and Line Subtype Each channels can be used for a separate external call incoming or outgoing and can be represented by a line appearance button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 104 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks e For a PRI card the number of channels depends on the Line Subtype For a PRI trunk 23 channels are supported for a T1 trunk 24 channels are supported e Advanced Setup This is used to access
134. e 33 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Changing the Initial Discovery Settings The Discovery tab of the Manager Preferences menu can be used to set the UDP and TCP addresses used by the discovery process run by the Select IP Office menu 1 Select File Preferences menu 2 Select the Discovery tab e Discovery TCP Discovery NIC IP NIC Subnet Lower IP Range Upper IP Range 192 168 42 203 255 255 255 0 192 168 42 1 192 168 42 254 IP Search Criteria 192 168 42 1 192 168 42 254 192 168 44 1 192 168 46 1 UDP Discovery Enter Broadcast IP Address 255 255 255 255 C Use DNS 3 Under UDP Discovery you can enter the default UDP broadcast address to be used by the discovery process 4 In the IP Search Criteria box you can enter IP addresses and IP address ranges for TCP discovery Addresses should be separated by semi colons ranges by dashes IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 34 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application Setting the Discovery Addresses 2 4 Known IP Office Discovery The Manager Select IP Office menu normally displays IP Office systems discovered by Manager using either UDP broadcast and or TCP requests see Setting the Discovery Addresses 334 Manager can be configured to also record details of discovered units and then display a list of those previously discovered known
135. e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e Unique Line Ringing Default 1 Software level 6 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for calls when alerting on an extension Calls forwarded sent to call coverage or to a hunt group will always use the line ring pattern Calls direct to an extension will use the line ringing pattern unless the user has Override Line Ringing set Not used for calls presented to the user as a member of the Operator group This feature is also not used for BST phones IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 94 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks DID Mapping Table This table is used to set the destination for incoming calls that include DID digits These are routed by matching the DID and ICLID information received with the call to an entry in the table This overrides the Coverage Destination settings of the channel on which the call was received Calls routing by DID mapping are not affected by the phone system being put into night service If the system is in Key system mode and no match is found the call is routed to the first extension in the system If the system is in PBX mode and no m
136. e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 12 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 900 4 5 Active Line Pickup A button set to this function allows the user to answer a call on a particular line It can be used if the call is ringing held or already answered by another extension e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and then 68 and the line number 4 6 Auto Dial Intercom A button set to this function allows the user to make a call to another specified extension The button lamp will also indicate when that other extension is in use e This type of button can be used for one touch transfer 234 operation 4 7 Auto Dial Other A button set to this function allows the user to make a call using a number stored by the button The number can be an internal number an external number an account code or any other number The button can then be used when a number of that type needs to be dialed IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 148 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Button Programming Auto Dial Other 4 8 Call Coverage A button set to this function allows the user to switch call cove
137. e call initiator though in some scenarios such as conferences this may vary If an extension hunt group is involved in the call its details will have priority over a trunk this includes remote SCN destinations Type Pa rty Device Party Name Internal Number E lt extension number lt name gt 00000 O Voicemail V 9500 channel number gt VM Channel lt channel number gt IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 188 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Appendix SMDR SMDR Fields Type Pa rty Device Party Name Conference V lt 1 gt lt conference number gt lt channel CO Channel lt conference number channel number gt number gt Line T 9000 line number Line lt ine number channel if applicable V 8000 device number U device class device number gt lt device channel Unknown Tone v8000 uoo 4 13 PartyiName The name of the device for an extension or agent this is the user name 14 Party2Device The other party for the SMDR record of this call segment See Party1Device above 15 Party2Name The other party for the SMDR record of this call segment See Party1Name above 16 Hold Time The amount of time in seconds the call has been held during this call segment 17 Park Time The amount of time in seconds the call has been parked during this call segment 18 AuthValid This field is used for authorization codes This field shows 1 fo
138. e card supports only 8 unlicensed channels External Expansion Modules The system can be expanded by the addition of up to 8 external expansion modules so long as the system extension and trunk support limits are not exceeded Analog Trunk Module ATM 16 This type of external expansion module supports 16 analog trunks Digital Station Modules DS16 DS16 V2 DS30 DS30 V2 These types of external expansion modules support 16 or 30 DS ports for Avaya digital station phones Advanced Digital Station Modules DS16A DS30A These types of external expansion modules support 16 or 30 ports which can be used as TCM ports for the connection of Avaya Nortel digital stations Analog Phone Modules Phone 8 Phone 16 Phone 30 These types of external expansion modules support 16 or 30 PHONE ports respectively for the connection of DTMF analog extensions Licenses Licenses are required for some features of IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode operation The license keys are entered into the system configuration and are based on the unique Feature Key number of the SD card installed in the system and the feature being enabled e Software Upgrade Licenses Existing systems being upgraded to IP Office Release 7 0 will require an upgrade license e New IP500v2 Systems For the first 90 days a new IP500v2 control unit will run any supported IP Office Release without requiring an upgrade license The highest level run is written into the system s memory not
139. e in the range of buttons now specified for lines e Outside Line Default Depend on system locale see below This option is only available for systems with their System Mode see above set to PBX System It sets the digit which when dialed indicates that the call is intended to be external Routing of any additional digits is then determined through the Outbound Call Handling 12 settings e 9 Operator is 0 The prefix 9 is used for external calls The digit O is used for calls to the operator extension the first extension in the system This is the default setting for systems with the Country setting United States e None No prefix is used for external calls Any dialing that does not match an internal dial plan number 175 is assumed to be an external call This is the default setting for systems with the Country setting other then Germany or United States e O Operator is 9 The prefix 0 is used for external calls The digit 9 is used for calls to the operator extension the first extension in the system This is the default setting for systems with the Country setting Germany e System Password Default Blank Range 4 digits This is a four digit code used to restrict access to some functions Once set the system password must be used to override station lock forced account or disallowed calls list or night service outward restrictions to make a call The system password is also requested when a user switches the phone syste
140. e minimum duration of signal required to be recognized Ring Off Maximum Default 5000ms Range 0 to 25500ms The time before signaling is regarded as ended Await Dial Tone Default 3000ms Range 0 to 25500ms Sets how long the system should wait before dialing out Intermediate Digit Pause Default 500ms Range 0 to 2550ms Pause between digits transmitted to the line Long CLI Line Default Off The CLI signal on some long analog lines can become degraded and is not then correctly detected If you are sure that CLI is being provided but not detected selecting this option may resolve the problem Modem Enabled Default Off The first analog trunk can be set to modem operation 2 V32 with V42 error correction This allows the trunk to answer incoming modem calls and be used for system maintenance When on the trunk can only be used for analog modem calls The short code 9000 can be used to toggle this setting For Release 6 1 and higher the modem feature can be accessed via an auto attendant or DID SIP URI by selecting 76 as the destination Trunk Type Default Loop Start ICLID Indicates whether the trunk receives incoming caller ID information or not If caller ID information is not provided select Loop Start 1f caller ID information is received select Loop Start ICLID Mains Hum Filter Mains Hum Filter Default Off If mains hum interference on the lines is detected or suspected this settings can be
141. e type of activation There are two separate menus one for Contact Closure Group 1 and one for Contact Closure Group 2 Each has the same range of settings Auxiliary Equipment Contact Closure Group 1 Setup Door Phone 1 Contact Closure Type 3 Seconds ON v Door Phone Extensions to be enabled Available Items Selected Items Contact Closure Group 1 10 mas 11 4 Lontact Liosure Group lt Contact Closure Group 2 12 AddAl gt gt Music On Hold 14 E 15 lt Remove SMDR 16 17 lt lt Remove All 18 18 v e Contact Closure Type Default 3 seconds On Sets how long the closure is activated when a user presses a contact closure button The options are 1 Second On 3 Seconds On 5 Seconds On and Toggle change the contact between open or closed e Extensions to be enabled Default None This table is used to select which user extensions are able to activate the contact closure by dialing feature codes at their extension or using programmable buttons set to the Contact Closure 685 feature IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 131 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 7 Auto Attendant Setup This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting Auto Attendant Setup This menu is used to configure the auto attendant facilities provided by the phone system For Release 6 1 up to 9 auto attendants are supported
142. earance button on phones that support button programming That button can then be used to make and answer calls using the channel The line appearance ID for each channel is automatically assigned to those channels that have their Direction set as Bothways e Direction Default Bothways Sets the allowed operation mode of the line For systems running in Key mode a line can be set to either Bothway incoming and outgoing or Incoming Call by Call incoming only For a system running in PBX mode a line can be set to either Bothway incoming and outgoing or Call by Call incoming and outgoing e Bothway When set to Bothway incoming calls are presented to line appearance buttons matching the channels Appearance ID and to the channels Coverage Destination if set For Key mode systems outgoing calls are routed to the channel by pressing the matching line appearance button selection or by automatic line selection 65 In addition on PBX mode systems outgoing calls can be routed to the channel by including the line appearance in the ARS Selector 122 that matches the dialed digits e Incoming Call by Call For systems running in Key mode when set to Incoming Call by Call incoming calls are routed using the Call by Call table The Appearance ID Coverage Destination and Unique Line Ringing fields are greyed out as those settings are not applied The trunk channel is not used for outgoing calls e Call by Call For systems running in PBX mode wh
143. ectory number Calls to that hunt group can be answered by any available member of the group The order in which calls are presented can be adjusted by selecting different group types and adjusting the order in which group members are listed The Group Management menu is used to configure which extensions are members of the different available groups You can also indicate which groups a user uses through the User Setup 614 menu Group Management Hunt Groups Configured Hunt Groups Name Number Ring Mode a Hurt Group 177i Calling Groups Hunt Group 2 72 Sequential Hunt Group 3 773 Sequential Hunt Group 4 774 Sequential Operator Group Hunt Group 5 775 Sequential Hunt Group 6 775 Sequential Night Service Group Assign Users to Group Available Users Selected Users 10 Add gt 11 Add All gt gt 13 3 14 15 16 lt Remove 17 18 lt lt Remove All 13 20 v Group Category Number Ring Mode Description Sequential Hunt groups are usable as the coverage destination for incoming external calls Six hunt groups may be configured Each extension can be a member of several hunt groups For each external line one of the hunt groups can be selected as the line s Coverage Destination Pickup Groups Sequential Users can be configured to pickup a call currently alerting any member of a pickup group Four pickup groups can be configured Night Service Group night service gro
144. ed File Device O mail F ctypes 0 9 5 win 186479 Application 30 09 20 od holdmusic way 170716 Wave Sound 15 10 20 Date Modifed 29 04 2008 13 39 46 Name 00031003 clp Download Size bytes 56637 Delete Ckri Del Announcement Data Copy Ctrl C Label Extn203 GREETING Format G 711 e Embedded Voicemail Files When viewing the memory card the files related to Embedded Voicemail are visible however these files are greyed out ie cannot be deleted downloaded or overwritten e Mailbox greetings and messages are shown as clp files e The language prompts for Embedded Voicemail functions are stored in separate language sub folders of Ivmail e Viewing a Memory Card When Advanced Embedded File Management is selected the IP Office Manager will go through normal system discovery When a system is selected a valid service user name and password for configuration access to that system is requested e Changing the Files View The type of display used in the Files pane can be changed by selecting from the View menu in the toolbar e Adding Files Files can be added to the card by dragging and dropping or by right clicking on the Files pane and selecting Upload or by using File Upload File The IP Office will ask for confirmation if the file already exists on the memory card The progress of the file upload is then indicated e Deleting Files Existing files can be deleted
145. ed Care should be taken to ensure that any tool used to create or edit the CSV supports all the characters expected and uses UTF 8 format e Exporting from Manager to Excel Do not double click on the file exported from Manager Start Excel and use File Open to select the file Excel will recognize that the file uses UTF 8 encoding and start its text file importation wizard Follow the wizard instructions and select comma as the field delimiter e Speed Dial Entries For each speed dial entry in the menu the following values are used e Name This is the name that will be associated with the speed dial e Number This is the external number that will be dialed by the telephone system when the speed dial code is dialed by an extension user e Speed dials beginning with are called marked speed dials and are treated differently A user can use a marked speed dial even if the number is in a disallowed list of which the user is a member Marked speed dials can also be used when an extension is locked When dialed the is not included If a is required to be dialed the speed dial should be start with e For PBX mode systems if the system is configured to use an Outside Line 48 prefix for outgoing external calls that prefix should be included in external speed dial numbers e Speed Dial Code Select a number between 600 and 699 Each number can only appear once in the list This is the short form substitute number for often used long
146. ed on each of the user s buttons e Button The button to which the feature is programmed The position of the button will vary depending on the type of phone e Label If the phone displays text labels next to each button you can enter the text that should be displayed To enter the label click on the label space after having selected the action for the button e Action This is the action performed by the button when pressed To select the action place your cursor in the box right click and select Assign a Feature from the drop menu This will display a comprehensive menu from which you can select the feature required See Programming Features 66 in the next section e Action Data For some actions when selecting the action you are asked to enter action data e Modify ALS Programming Default Off Automatic line selection is used to select which available line is used when the extension goes off hook to make a call without the user first pressing a specific line or intercom button for example if the user just lifts the handset or presses the speaker button By default all analog line buttons lowest to highest and the two intercom buttons are used in that order If Modify ALS Programming is selected the order of line selection is displayed and can be edited e Print Label for this Extension If you have the DESI label printing application installed on the computer this control transfers the information required to print labels for t
147. em centralized and personal telephone administration IP Office Web Manager Systems can now be configured via web browser The default access is via the same Administrator account as used for IP Office Manager and via a new default BusinessPartner account The BusinessPartner account can be used to create additional user accounts for IP Office Web Manager and to set what aspects of the configuration those additional accounts can change Analog Trunk Unsupervised Disconnect Operation In areas where no disconnect clear signalling or reliable tone disconnect is available the system operation can be set for unsupervised disconnect on analog trunks When enabled unsupervised transfers and trunk to trunk transfers to analog trunks are not allowed Intuity Mode Embedded Voicemail Support Previous software releases have used IP Office mode key presses to navigate the Embedded Voicemail menus The system now supports Intuity mode key presses The mode used by the system is selectable Intuity mode is the default used for new systems Prompt Set Upgrade Changes Previously for IP500 V2 systems when upgrading the system files all files were updated including the sets of prompt files for all languages supported by Embedded Voicemail For IP Office Release 8 0 the following changes have been made e When upgrading the system files the current configuration of the system is used to determine which files to include in the upgrade in addition to the syst
148. em and phone firmware files This applies when using the Upload System Files option during a system upgrade File Advanced Upgrade 174 or when using Upload System Files within embedded file management File Advanced Embedded File Management 176 e Embedded voicemail prompts are only upgraded if the system is currently configured to use Embedded Voicemail English language prompts are upgraded as follows IP Office A Law Norstar SD Cards UK English IP Office U Law PARTNER SD Cards US English Other languages are upgraded if they match the locale languages of the system locale user locales incoming call route locales or short code locales in the system s configuration e The files for IP Office Web Manager are only upgraded for systems configured to IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode IP Office Basic Edition PARTNER 9 Mode or IP Office Basic Edition Norstar Mode mode e When editing the configuration of a system that uses Embedded Voicemail when the locale of the system a user a short code or an incoming call route is change IP Office Manager will display a warning if the matching set of prompts on the System SD card have not be upgraded e A new option within IP Office Manager Add Display VM locales 17 can be used to display the upgraded languages on the SD card and to upload an additional language or languages e The Recreate IP Office SD Card 17 command still adds all the available Embedded Voicemail language
149. en set to Call by Call incoming calls are routed using the Call by Call table The Appearance ID Coverage Destination and Unique Line Ringing fields are greyed out as those settings are not applied In PBX mode call by call entries can be used given ARS selector numbers see below which allow the trunk channel to also be used for outgoing calls e Display Name Default Use Authentication Name This field sets the Name value for SIP calls using this URI e Local URI The user part of the SIP URI This specifies the contents of the FROM field when making a call sending an INVITE e Anonymous Withhold the calling parties information e Coverage Destination Default None System Mode Key System This option sets where incoming calls should alert in addition to alerting on those extension that have a line appearance button programmed for the line When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 77 group e None If set to None incoming calls will only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the line s Appearance ID e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt
150. ension is supported on the system e Door Phone 1 Door Phone 2 Select this option for an extension connected to a door phone The phone system can support two such devices The setting is linked to the Assign Extension setting on the Door Phone 1 128 and Door Phone 2 128 menus which set which users are alerted when the door phone goes off hook e Fax Machine Select this option for an extension connected to a fax machine e Standard Select this option for a standard telephone extension e Phantom This option is automatically selected for users who do not have a matching physical extension Phantom users 224 can still be used for a range of functions such as voicemail The setting cannot be changed IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 74 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup Restrictions e Forced Account Code Entry Default Off For each user if this setting is selected that user is required to enter an account code from the Account Code Entries 564 list when making an external call This can only be overridden by use of the System Password 47 to make a call e Outgoing Call Restrictions Defau t No Restriction For each user this field sets the type of outgoing external calls that the user can normally make Any restrictions applied do not apply to numbers in the Emergency Number List 55 and to numbers in any Allowed Lists 534 of
151. ension numbers are assigned to additional phantom extensions IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 17 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Special Dialed Numbers The following can be dialed after selecting an Intercom button or simply going off hook for which Intercom is assumed Number Function Description EN Calls the first extension in the system 610 to 657 Extension Pickup 661 to 664 Group Pickup 6801 6864 Answer the call alerting at another extension Dial 6 followed by the extension number Dial 66 followed by the pickup group number 1 to 4 Answer the call alerting on a particular line Dial 68 followed by the line number 01 to 64 Loudspeaker Page Makes a call to the extension configured as the system s Loudspeaker Paging extension Calling Group Dial 7 followed by the calling group number 1 to 4 Prefix the number with to page the group This is supported only on systems with their Mode set to PBX Prefix the number with to page the group Operator Group Modem port 235 Used for remote access for configuration Dial 77 followed by the hunt group number 1 to 6 Prefix the number with to page the group Voicemail Collect Connects the extension to the extension user s own mailbox UO oO a 9 er o Remote Voicemail Connects the extension to prompts to specify the mailbox required This voicemail code of the mailbox is then requested
152. enu options can be varied according to the time of day These radio buttons are used to select which set of actions are current displayed and editable within IP Office Manager e The button below the key actions table can be used to copy the current set of actions for the selected Type to all the other types in the current auto attendant This overrides all the existing settings for actions and destinations e Key The standard telephone dial pad keys O to 9 plus and Fax e Action The following actions can be assigned to each key e No Action The corresponding key takes no action e Dial by Name Callers are asked to dial the name of the user they require and then press The recorded mailbox name prompts of matching users are then played back for the caller to make a selection The name order used is set by the Dial by Name Match Order setting Users without a recorded name prompt or set to Ex Directory are not included Users can record their name by accessing their mailbox and dialing 05 e Dial By Number This option allows callers with DTMF phones to dial the extension number of the user they require No destination is set for this option The Direct Dial By Number setting above determines how the digits dialed with this action are used e Transfer to Auto Attendant Software level 6 1 This option transfers the caller to another indicated auto attendant This will skip the greeting menu of that auto attendant playing just the
153. er 1 Telephony Features IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 5 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 1 Telephony Features This section covers details of the feature configurable for an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system using IP Office Manager It is an operating mode of IP Office that support up to 32 analogue trunks and 100 users 100 if using a 3 digit dial plan 48 is using a 2 digit dial plan It is the default mode assumed by a IP500v2 control unit fitted with a new IP Office A Law or IP Office U Law SD card In addition to analogue trunks SIP trunks and digital BRI or PRI trunks are also supported IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode itself also operates in either of two system modes behaving as either a key system or a PBX system 11 Systems with an Mu Law SD card default to Key system operation those with an A Law SD card default to PBX system operation However this setting can be changed within the system configuration if required IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode mode systems can be changed to IP Office standard mode operation if required This is done by selecting using IP Office Manager File Advanced Switch to Standard Mode 175 Supported Phones The following phones are supported by IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems running IP Office Release 8 1 FP1 software e Avaya DS Digital Stations These phones use digital station DS ports provided
154. er Address 0 0 0 0 Call Initiation Timeout 4 v Re invite Supported Mobility Caller ID Format None v DTMF Support Info B Use Offered Codec o Use Tel URI rl ves vei Registration Expiry feo 8l min PRACK 100rel Supported C Calls Route Via Registrar Method 9 Request L v Fax Trarispoit Support Nane d Name System Default v Priority SY REFER Support Association Method By Source IP address v Incoming Auto v Outgoing Auto v User Agent and Server Headers Caller ID from From UPDATE Supported Never v header o Send From In Clea C Channel Setup Channel Appearance ID VMS Delay Day VMS Delay Night VMS Schedule VMS Auto Attendant Incoming Number Result Include In Dial Plan Number Result Action Dial Plan 7 Incoming Number Filter Hx DN Dial Local 1N Dial Local Trunk Parameters e Proxy Server Address In exceptional circumstances the IP Address of the proxy server may be explicitly identified as either a different IP Address or a different domain address resolvable by DNS e DNS Server Address If the proxy server address is set to a named server the address of the DNS server used for name resolution should be entered here e Mobility Caller ID Format This option corresponds to the standard draft ietf sip privacy 04 The options are None Remote Party ID P Asserted ID or Diversion Header e Use Tel URI Default Off Use Tel URI f
155. erage Destination for a particular line The call is presented immediately to that auto attendant e Delayed Optional Auto Attendant Service The VMS Schedule setting of each line can be used to set whether unanswered calls should go to a selected auto attendant The settings can be enabled for day service night service 215 both or never the default The delay used before going to the auto attendant is set by the line s VMS Delay Day and VMS Delay Night settings as appropriate Greeting Times The auto attendant can provide different greetings at different times of the day The greeting is always followed by the separate menu options greeting These fields are used to set the time periods during which each greetings is used If the time periods overlap the greeting used is the first one that is valid for the time period in the order morning afternoon or evening For call outside a configured time period or when the system is set to night service the out of office hours greeting is used e Morning Default 08 00 to 11 59 Set the operation times for the morning greetings e Afternoon Default 12 00 to 17 59 Set the operation times for the afternoon greetings e Evening Default 18 00 to 21 00 Set the operation times for the evening greetings IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 133 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configure Profiles These are the general settings for the au
156. ervice 21 modes e Day Only Redirect calls only when the system is not in night service e Night Only Redirect calls only when the system is in night service e Never Do not redirect calls e VMS Auto Attendant Default Auto Attendant 1 Software Level 6 1 This field allows selection of which auto attendant is used by this line IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 101 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 3 2 3 PRI Advanced AT amp T Specific Setup This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks These settings are only available for a PRI trunk where the Provider 9 has been set to AT amp T Trunks PRI Advanced AT amp T Specific Setup Trunk Number 8 TNS Code TNS Codes Special ShortCode Number Special Plan New No perator National Call By Call ShortCode Number Service New New None TNS Code e TNS Codes This table is used to set the TNS Transit Network Selection information element for 4ESS and 5ESS exchanges It is also used to set fields in the NSF information element These are prefixes for alternative long distance carriers When a number dialed matches an entry in the table that pattern is stripped from the number before being sent out For example if the pattern 10XXX is added to this tab when 10
157. es the host part of the FROM header in the incoming SIP request for association The match is found by comparing the FROM header against a list of IP addresses resulting from resolution of the line s Domain Name or if set the Proxy Server Address e Via header hostpart against DNS resolved ITSP domain This option uses the host part of the VIA header in the incoming SIP request for association The match is found by comparing the VIA header against a list of IP addresses resulting from resolution of the line s Domain Name or if set the line s Proxy Server Address e From header hostpart against ITSP proxy This option uses the host part of the From header in the incoming SIP request for association The match is against the line s Proxy Server Address e To header hostpart against ITSP proxy This option uses the host part of the From header in the incoming SIP request for association The match is against the line s Proxy Server Address e R URI hostpart against ITSP proxy This option uses the host part of the Request URI in the incoming SIP request for association The match is against the line s Proxy Server Address IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 117 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e User Agent and Server Headers Defau t Blank Use system type and software level Software Level 8 1 FP1 The value set in this field is used as the User Agent and Server value included
158. ess field 2 Click Refresh to perform a new search Changing the bin File Directory Used The directory in which the Upgrade Wizard looks for bin files is set through Manager s Binary Directory setting This can be changed using File Preferences Directories 163 It can also be changed directly from the Upgrade Wizard as follows 1 Right click on the list area 2 Select Select Directory 3 Browse to and highlight the folder containing the bin files Click OK 4 The list in the Available column will be updated to show the bin files in the selected directory that match IP Office units or modules listed IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 174 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 1 7 5 Switch to Standard Mode IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode is the default mode assumed by a IP500v2 control unit fitted with an IP Office A Law or IP Office Mu Law System SD card This option will change the operating mode of the configuration loading in Manager to that of a IP Office Essential Edition system Manager will automatically switch to its advanced view mode When the configuration is sent back to the IP Office system the system will restart in IP Office Essential Edition The command provides two options Default Using this method to switch to IP Office Essential Edition will default the configuration It is the recommended method for installat
159. ettings of the button still apply IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 72 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup e Call Coverage Ring Default 2 10 seconds Programmable buttons set to Call Coverage 14 can be used to switch call coverage on or off for a user When on calls that ring unanswered for this number of rings are redirected to alert on a covering extension Ensure that this setting is set lower than the users VMS Cover Ring if using Automatic VMS Cover e Call Waiting Extension Default Not Assigned If Assigned on an analog extension when the user is on a call an additional call will cause a tone to be heard as part of the existing call e Automatic VMS Cover Default Not Assigned If Assigned voicemail is used to answer calls to the user that have rung for the VMS Cover Ring time This setting is ignored for any extension configured as a loudspeaker paging extension e Transfer Return Extension Default None Software level 6 1 Set the destination for transferred calls that ring unanswered for longer than the Transfer Return Ring 138i setting Note that if a door phone or paging extension is selected the call will continue ringing at the transfer destination rather than returning e VMS Cover Ring Default 3 15 seconds Range 0 to 9 If Automatic VMS Cover above is assigned this value sets how long a call alerts the user
160. extension and daughter cards available for selection in the following steps Changing the locale will cause any existing hardware selections to be cleared IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 44 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application Creating a Configuration File e The options are Argentina Australia Bahrain Belgium Brazil Canada Chile China Customize Denmark Egypt Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Italy Korea Kuwait Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Oman Pakistan Peru Poland Portugal Qatar Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Turkey United Arab Emirates United States Venezuela 6 Select the extension number length that should be used the options are 2 or 3 7 In the Select Extension and Daughter Cards section select the cards that match those in the system to which the configuration will be loaded e Ensure that these match the actual physical positions of the cards that are or will be installed in the system If the arrangement of cards needs to be changed at a later date it may require the whole configuration to be deleted e For system administration through the first two extensions the card in slot 1 must support Avaya digital phones ie a Dig Sta 8 Combo DS6 or ETR6 e The ETR6 extension card is only selectable for systems with a United States Cana
161. features that should only be adjusted to match the requirements of the line provider IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 105 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 T1 Trunk Channel Setup This table is used to set which trunk channels are available for use e Channel For information only not editable Not that this indicates the maximum number of channels not the number of licensed channels usable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned This number is used to uniquely identify the telephone line or channel The number can be assigned to programmable buttons on extensions to allow the users to make and answer calls on that line or channel e In Service Default Out of Service Selects whether the trunk channel is in use e Coverage Destination Default None System Mode Key System This option sets where incoming calls should alert in addition to alerting on those extension that have a line appearance button programmed for the line When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 77 gt group e None If set to None incoming calls will only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the line s Appearance ID e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hun
162. figuration settings are mergeable it will select Merge by default otherwise it will select Immediate e Immediate Send the configuration and then reboot the IP Office e When Free Send the configuration and reboot the IP Office when there are no calls in progress This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Timed The same as When Free but waits for a specific time after which it then wait for there to be no calls in progress The time is specified by the Reboot Time This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Reboot Time This setting is used when the reboot mode Timed is selected It sets the time for the IP Office reboot If the time is after midnight the IP Office s normal daily backup is canceled e Call Barring These settings can be used when the reboot mode When Free is selected They bar the sending or receiving of any new calls IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 170 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 1 7 3 System Shutdown This command can be used to shutdown systems with IP Office Release 6 or higher software The shut down can be either indefinite or for a set period of time after which the IP Office will reboot WARNINGS e A shutdown must always be used to switch off the system Simply removing the power cord or switching off the power input may cause errors e This is not a polite shutdow
163. figured as line appearance button according to the system Number of Lines 484 setting If the system setting Number of Lines 484 is changed it may overwrite all or some of the current button programming The menu can operate in either of two ways depending on whether the phone type is known or not See the Handset setting IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 63 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 User Setup Button Programming User Buttons Butt Label Action Action Data User 1 Appearance a 10 be 2 Appearance b 3 Line Appearance t 4 Line Appearance 02 5 Line Appearance 03 6 Line Appearance 04 r 8 Copy and Print n Available Users A 11 11 12 E 2 13 15 14 16 15 17 18 18 13 18 Last Number Redial 20 Conference Drop Select All Print Labels 21 Voicemail Collect z 5 22 Recall Copy Feature Button 23 24 V Modify ALS Programming Print Label for this Extension Line 01 Line 02 Line 03 Line 04 Intercom 1 Non Graphical Mode Unknown phone type User Setup Button Programming User Buttons User 10 v Handset Copy and Print Available Users F 11 F 12 E 13 14 O 15 O 18 C 19 o Select All Print Labels is Copy Feature Buttons Modify ALS Programming Print Label for thi
164. for extension matching For example if 2 is set in the actions to Dial by Number a caller can dial 20 for extension 20 e If not selected the key press for the action is not included in any following digits dialed by the caller for extension matching For example if 2 is set in the actions to Dial by Number a caller must dial 2 and then 20 for extension 20 e Follow Night Service Defau t On Software level 6 1 When selected while the system is in night service the auto attendant will switch to using its out of hours greetings and menu actions If not selected when the system is in night service the auto attendant will use the greetings and menu options as determined by its time profile settings e Dial by Name Match Order Default Last then First Determines the name order used for keys set to the Dial by Name action The options are First then Last or Last then First e Language Default Match system language Software level 6 1 This settings controls the language used for auto attendant action prompts If not set the system Language 48 setting is used e The options are Arabic Brazilian Portuguese Canadian French Cantonese Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Korean Mandarin Norwegian Portuguese Russian Spanish Spanish Argentinean Spanish Latin Spanish Mexican Swedish Taiwanese UK English US English e Morning When this Profile is selected the morning greeting and morning menu option
165. for there to be no calls in progress The time is specified by the Reboot Time This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Reboot Time This setting is used when the reboot mode Timed is selected It sets the time for the IP Office reboot If the time is after midnight the IP Office s normal daily backup is canceled e Call Barring These settings can be used when the reboot mode When Free is selected They bar the sending or receiving of any new calls 3 Click OK A Service User name and password may be requested e If the service user name or password used do not have a match on the IP Office Access Denied is displayed e The message Failed to save the configuration data Internal error may indicate that the system has booted using software other than that in its System SD card s primary folder IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 37 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 38 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application Saving the Configuration 2 6 Saving a Configuration to a PC File The IP Office configuration settings shown within Manager can be saved to a cfg file on the Manager PC These files can be used as backups Automatically Saving Configuration Copies By default Manager creates a file copy of the configuration before it is sent to the IP Office system
166. g by DID mapping are not affected by the phone system being put into night service If the system is in Key system mode and no match is found the call is routed to the first extension in the system If the system is in PBX mode and no match is found the call is routed to the Operator group The table is applied to all channels e DID Number If the incoming DID of a call on the trunk matches the DID set here it will be routed to this destination The system supports up to 4 digits DID additional digits after the first 4 are ignored Leave blank if only CLI matching is required e Incoming CLI If the incoming caller number on the trunk matches the Incoming CLI set here it will be routed to this destination Leave blank if only DID matching is required e Destination When this field is selected the drop down list allows selection of the destination for matching calls The options differ depending on whether the system s System Mode 484 is set to Key System or PBX System e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 775 e Operator Group For s
167. ge This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting Trunks Outbound Call Handling Dial Numbers The Dial Numbers Table is used to match dialing prefixes to the group of trunks defined in the ARS Selector 12A table Modify ARS ARS Selectors Dial Numbers Dial Numbers Table Class Of Call Number Outgoing Lines ARS Local Default 65 66 National 01 02 65 66 International oo e5 66 Emergency 999 1 12 65 66 Cell B5 66 TollFree 080 B5 66 NOTE Multiple numbers separated by a can be configured for an ARS Select Outgoing ARS Available ARS Selected ARS 67 Add gt 65 66 lt Remove lt lt Remove All e Dial Numbers Table e Class of Call The available classes are Local National International Emergency Cell and Toll Free For each you can define the numbers the dialing prefixes that match that call type and the ARS selector groups to which matching calls should be routed e Number For each class of call this field is used to define the dialing prefix up to 5 digits expected for the call to match the class Multiple prefix numbers can be entered each separated by a comma e Do not include the Outside Line 485 prefix digit configured in the system settings e If a match occurs in more than one class the most exact match is used ie the one with the most digits If multiple matches still exist the match that occurs f
168. gement f Usor Settings T4 Trunks Configure User Button Programming cy Auxiliary Equipment Manage Hunt Groups S Administer Auto Attendant AE Auto Attendant Setup Setup Auxiliary Equipments 9 Advanced Update Trunk Configurations Name IP ffice 3 IP Address 192168421 Version 7 00 Mode QUICK Edition Status Offline Feature Key N A Expansion Modules NONE Feature Key NONE Serial Number 000000000000 g IP Address 192 168 42 1 Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 System Locale United States US English Number assigned to first Extension 10 Number of Extensions on System 8 Daylight Saving Enabled System Trunks per phone 4 Licenses Installed NONE ETR 1 Digital Extensions Connected NONE Hunt Group Extensions Pickup Group Extensions Calling Group Extensions Night Service Group Extensions NONE Assigned Allowed List Extensions Disallowed List Extensions b If only one system is found but its administrator password is not set to password the menu for entering the valid name and password is displayed Configuration Service User Login IP Office Service User Name 00E007020883 IP 406 DS Service User Password Coo c If several systems are found the Select IP Office menu is displayed Use this menu to select which system to load For details of adjusting Select IP Office Version 3 0 O wGc_Gi50 Version 3 2 C IP406 v2 lt Name IP Address 192 1
169. ger Page 119 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Channel Setup e Channel Channel number cannot be edited e Appearance Each channel can be accessed through pressing a Line Appearance to make calls answer calls or conference Lamps on the button reflect whether the channel is in use e VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant when the system is not running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Days Only e VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant when the system is running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Night Only e VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when the VMS Delay settings above should be used and unanswered calls redirected to an auto attendant The options are e Always Redirect calls when the system is in both day and night service 21 modes e Day Only Redirect calls only when the system is not in night service e Night Only Redirect calls only when the system is in night service e Never Do not redirect calls e VMS Auto Attendant Default Auto Attendant 1 Software Level 6 1 This field allows selection of which auto attendant is used by this line Dial Plan The dial plan is use
170. group members are alerted one at a time in sequence starting from the lowest numbered pickup group extension number to the highest Ringing calls are picked up in oldest first order e Ring All All the available group members are alerted at the same time Assign Users to Group This table is used to select which extension users are members of the currently selected group Group Call Distribution A line can be configured to present its incoming calls to one of the 6 hunt groups The incoming calls hunts from one hunt group extension to the next using the same hunting algorithm as used for an intercom call to that hunt group extension number The call rings with the outside call ringing pattern and the display shows caller ID information if any If the hunt group extension that is chosen to ring as part of the selection algorithm has a line appearance for the line then the call alerts on the line appearance with the standard slow flashing green LED indicative of a ringing call for me Line ringing options are overridden and the line always rings immediately Any other extensions in the hunt group with the line appearance that have not been selected as part of the algorithm will show the slow flashing red LED indicative of a ringing call but not for me In addition any other extensions in the system with the line appearance but not part of the hunt group will show the slow flashing red LED indication If the hunt group extension that is chosen to r
171. h may own the Mark Nothing contained in this site the documentation s and product s should be construed as granting by implication estoppel or otherwise any license or right in and to the Marks without the express written permission of Avaya or the applicable third party Avaya is a registered trademark of Avaya Inc All non Avaya trademarks are the property of their respective owners Downloading documents For the most current versions of documentation see the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Contact Avaya Support Avaya provides a telephone number for you to use to report problems or to ask questions about your product The support telephone number is 1 800 242 2121 in the United States For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Web site http www avaya com support Page 2 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Contents 1 Telephony Features 1 1 What s New in Release 8 0 sees 9 1 2 Key System or PBX System 11 1 2 1 Outgoing Call Routing eesssss 11 1 2 2 Incoming Call Routing esses 13 1 3 DIA Pari 22m reete 17 1 4 Date and Time Setting sesssssssssssss 20 1 5 Voicemail Operation ssssssssssssses 20 1 6 Night Service neon cerent pace ced dee 21 1 7 Phantom Extensions 22 1 8 One Touch Transfer sse 23 1 9 Modem Access Support
172. has made a call to 11 However the Party2Device and Party2Name show that the call was answered by voicemail 2008 10 20 06 43 58 00 00 10 21 15 0 11 11 1 28 0 E15 Extn15 V9051 VM Channel 1 0 0 Call Transferred to Voicemail In this example the Continuation field in the first record tells us that it wasn t the end of the call The matching Call ID identifies the second record as part of the same call The change in Party 1 details between the two records show that the call was transferred to voicemail 2008 06 28 09 30 57 00 00 13 7 01707392200 1 299999 299999 0 1000014160 1 E4750 John Smith T9002 LINE 1 2 11 0 2008 06 28 09 30 57 00 00 21 0 01707392200 1 299999 299999 0 1000014160 0 V9502 VM Channel 2 T9002 LINE 1 2 0 0 External Call The Is Internal field being 0 shows this to be a external call The Direction field as I shows that it was an incoming call The Ring Time was 7 seconds and the total Connected Time was 5 seconds 2008 08 01 15 14 19 00 00 05 7 01707299900 1 23 390664 0 1000013 0 E23 Extn23 T9001 Line 1 2 0 0 n n n rrr Internal call The Is Internal field being 1 shows this to be a internal call The Ring Time was 4 seconds and the total Connected Time was 44 seconds 2008 06 26 10 27 44 00 00 44 4 4688 0 4207 4207 1 1000013898 0 E4688 Joe Bloggs E4207 John Smith 0 0 Outgoing Call The combination of the Direction field being outbound and the Is Internal field be 0 show that this was a outgoing external call T
173. he TLS protocol This will use the ports set for secure configuration and secure security access It also requires the configuration and or security service within the IP Office s security configuration settings to have been set to support secure access Depending on the level of that secure access selected it may be necessary for the Manager Certificate Checks below to be configured to match those expected by the IP Office configuration and or security service e When Secure Communications is set to On a 1 padlock icon is displayed at all times in the lower right Manager status field e Manager Certificate Checks Software level 4 14 When the Secure Communications option above is used Manager will process and check the certificate received from the IP Office This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 166 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu e Low Any certificate sent by IP Office certificate is accepted without question e Medium Any certificate sent by IP Office is accepted if it has previously been previously saved in the Windows certificate store If the certificate has not been previously saved the user has the option to review and either accept or reject the certificate e High Any certific
174. he current user IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 65 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 3 1 1 Programming Features This menu allows a range of individual functions to be assigned to the button HA Set Button Programming Information Programming Features System Programming Feature Line Assignment Making Calls Auto Dial Outside Auto Dial ICM Auto Dial ICM Page Group Calling Page Group Calling Ring Group Hunting Page Group Hunting Ring Last Number Redial Loudspeaker Paging Save Number Redial Simultaneous Page Hot Dial Coverage Call Coverage Call Forwarding VMS Cover Answering Calls CallLog Call Pickup Caller ID Inspect Caller ID Name Display Direct Line Pickup Active Direct Line Pickup Idle Pickup Group VMS Transfer Call Screening Messaging Absent Message Voicemail Collect Message Alert Notification Other Account Code Entry Conference Drop Contact Closure 1 Contact Closure 2 Do Not Disturb O Privacy Recall Station Lock Station Unlock Blank IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 66 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup Making Calls Auto Dial Outside 148 Action Data Telephone number to dial A bu
175. he line and in this case channel used are indicated by the Party2 Name and being a digital channel the Ring Time before the call was answered is also shown 2008 06 28 08 55 02 00 08 51 9 4797 0 08000123456 08000123456 0 1000014129 0 E4797 Joe Bloggs T9001 LINE 1 1 0 0 Voicemail Call The two records below show calls to voicemail The first shows the Dialed Number as 17 the default short code for voicemail access The second shows the Dialed Number as VoiceMail indicating some other method such as the Message key on a phone was used to initiate the call 2008 06 28 09 06 03 00 00 19 0 4966 0 17 17 1 1 1000014131 0 E4966 John Smith V9501 VM Channel 1 0 0 2008 06 28 09 06 03 00 00 19 0 4966 0 VoiceMail VoiceMail 1 1000014134 0 E4966 John Smith V9501 VM Channel 1 0 0 Parked Call In this example the first record has a Park Time showing that the call was parked The Continuation field indicates that the call did not end this way and there are further records The second record has the same Call ID and shows a change in the Party2Name 4 indicating that party unparked the call Note also that both records share the same call start time 2008 10 20 07 18 31 0 00 12 3 215 0 210 210 1 38 1 E15 Extn15 E10 Extn10 0 7 2008 10 20 07 18 31 0 00 10 0 215 0 210 210 1 38 0 E15 Extn15 E11 Extn11 0 0 Incoming call with Account Code In this example at some stage as the call was made or during the call an Account Code has been entered In
176. he user is a member and also by marked system speed dials 57 There are eight lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits O to 9 4 and can be up to 28 digits long You can also use the character as a single digit wildcard Emergency Numbers You can enter 10 emergency phone numbers into this list This list is applied to all users and overrides any dialing restrictions that may also be applied to the users IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 11 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e Account Codes Each user can be configured to need to enter a valid account code whenever they make an external call e Outgoing Call Restrictions For each user the type of external calls that the user is able to make can be configured e Marked Speed Dials When a user uses a stored system speed dial number the actual number dialed is subject to all the call barring methods as if the user had dialed the number directly However system speed dials set as marked speed dials override any call restrictions e Night Service 215 When the system is set to night service any users in the Night Service Group need to enter the system password when making an external call IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 12 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features Key System or PBX System 1 2 2 Incoming Cal
177. heir phone When set the absent message is also displayed on other extensions when they call the user e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e For IP Office Release 7 0 the button can also be used to check the absent message setting of other users When pressed pressing the Auto Dial Intercom 148 button of another user will display that users current absent message setting alternately select Insp and dial the user s extension number e Not supported on ETR6 and 1403 phones Not supported on BST phones without a display and soft keys 4 4 Account Code Entry A button set to this function allows the user to enter an account code prior to making a call or during a call e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e Once a user has associated an account code with a call only that user can change the account code by entering another one
178. host with IP address X can send a packet to the internal host only if the internal host had previously sent a packet to IP address X SIP packets needs to be mapped Responses from hosts are restricted to those that a packet has been sent to So if multiple ITSP hosts are to be supported a keep alive will need to be sent to each host If this type of NAT Firewall is detected or manually selected no warning will be displayed for this type of NAT e Port Restricted Cone NAT A port restricted cone NAT is like a restricted cone NAT but the restriction includes port numbers Specifically an external host can send a packet with source IP address X and source port P to the internal host only if the internal host had previously sent a packet to IP address X and port P SIP packets needs to be mapped Keep alives must be sent to all ports that will be the source of a packet for each ITSP host IP address If this type of NAT Firewall is detected or manually selected no warning will be displayed for this type of NAT However some Port Restricted have been found to be more symmetric in behavior creating a separate binding for each opened Port if this is the case the manager will display NATs a warning Communication is not possible unless the STUN server is supported on same IP address as the ITSP as part of the manager validation e Unknown Use this setting if the other settings are unsuitable e Static Port Block Use the RTP port range 49152 to 532
179. icemail is not screened e While a call is being screened e The mailbox greeting played and the caller can be heard on the phone s speakerphone The caller cannot hear the user e The user is regarded as being active on a call They will not be presented with hunt group calls and additional personal calls use abbreviated ringing e For 1400 9500 Series phones if the phone s default audio path is set to headset or the phone is idle on headset then the screened call is heard through the headset e Any additional calls that go to the user s mailbox when they are already screening a call remain at the mailbox and are not screened even if the existing call being screened is ended e Making or answering another call while listening to a screened call is treated as ignoring the screened call e Another user bridging into a screen call answers the call e Phone based administration cannot be accessed and the hold transfer and conference buttons are ignored e The screened caller using DTMF breakout ends the call screening e Enabling do not disturb overrides call screening except for calls from numbers in the user s do not disturb exceptions list e Locking the phone overrides call screening e Manual call recording cannot be applied to a call being screened e While a call is being screened it uses one of the available voicemail channels If no voicemail channels are available call screening does not occur IP Office Basic Edition Qu
180. ick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 151 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Any call currently being screened will continue being screened but further calls will not receive screening e Direct Line Pickup can be used to answer a call that is being screened e While listening to call screening you can press an appearance button to make answer or join another call When you do this the screened call is ignored and the new call is connected However on ETR phones the new call is connected as listen only microphone off and speaker on In order to speak on the call the user needs to lift the handset or touch the Mic HFAI button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 152 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Button Programming Call Screening 4 16 Conference Drop A button set to this function allows the user to drop a call from a conference e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing
181. ide i ICM i ICM Page es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt vV es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es lt lt Uu es Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes e Ce O Y Mab O har Sn way O O OOO O mea VMSCover IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 200 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Hunt Groups ves ves T e PBX Outgoing Call Routing Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin ARS Selectors Type Details Lines Outgoing Lines ARS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Auxiliary Equipment Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Door Phone Assign Extension Extensions 1 and 2 Music on Hold Yes Extensi
182. il mailboxes that are not associated with an existing physical extension These mailboxes can be accessed and used by the auto attendant menus and other functions e The system assumes that the base control unit is always fully populated with up to 32 extensions either real or phantom or a mix to which it assigns extension numbers in sequence It does this before assigning extension numbers to any real extensions on attached external expansion modules up to the system extension limit If the system extension limit has not been exceeded any remaining extension numbers are assigned to additional phantom extensions The Manager application s menus and phone based administration menus allow selection of a phantom user extension number in the same was as for normal physical extension numbers Phantom extensions are indicated by in front of the extension number That includes using a phantom extension as the destination in an auto attendant trunk DID call map SIP call by call mapping etc e Calls to a phantom extensions are treated as follows e Calls go immediately to the phantom user s voicemail mailbox Forwarded or transferred calls go to the mailbox of the user doing the transfer or forward e If the phantom extension is included in a hunt group they are ignored e Callers can use the phantom user s mailbox DTMF breakout settings if configured to be transferred to another destination e Calls can be transferred to a phantom extension
183. ing as part of the selection algorithm does not have a line appearance for the line then the call alerts on an intercom button When the hunt group extension that is ringing answers the call the green LED goes steady red off and all other extensions in the system with the line appearance transition to the green off steady red LED indication After three rings the call shall hunt to the next available extension in the hunt group using the hunt algorithm When the call hunts the previously alerting extension stops alerting and returns to the idle condition If the call was ringing on a line appearance the line appearance state changes to slow red flashing indicating that the call is ringing elsewhere If the call had been ringing on an ICOM appearance the intercom button appearance is idled At any time while the call is hunting from extension to extension any extension in the system can answer the call by either touching the line appearance of the line or using one of the pickup features active line pickup call pickup group call pickup An outside call that hunts never goes to voicemail and will hunt until answered or abandoned Outside calls ringing into a hunt group to a targeted extension are eligible for internal forwarding that might be active at the targeted hunt group extension The call will be forwarded to another extension and if unanswered continues hunting away from the forward to extension to the next hunt group extension If f
184. ing set Not used for calls presented to the user as a member of the Operator group This feature is also not used for BST phones IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 88 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks DID Mapping Table This table is used to set the destination for incoming calls that include DID digits These are routed by matching the DID and ICLID information received with the call to an entry in the table This overrides the Coverage Destination settings of the channel on which the call was received Calls routing by DID mapping are not affected by the phone system being put into night service If the system is in Key system mode and no match is found the call is routed to the first extension in the system If the system is in PBX mode and no match is found the call is routed to the Operator group The table is applied to all channels e DID Number If the incoming DID of a call on the trunk matches the DID set here it will be routed to this destination The system supports up to 4 digits DID additional digits after the first 4 are ignored Leave blank if only CLI matching is required e Incoming CLI If the incoming caller number on the trunk matches the Incoming CLI set here it will be routed to this destination Leave blank if only DID matching is required e Destination When this field is selected the drop down list allows selection of the des
185. ion of a new installation or for when a IP Office Essential Edition system has been defaulted and needs to be returned to IP Office Essential Edition operation Best Match Using this method to switch to IP Office Essential Edition mode will attempt to preserve configuration settings for examples user names extension numbers licenses SIP trunks etc However many settings will be flagged as errors by Manager These should be resolved before sending the configuration to the system For IP Office Release 8 0 and higher for a system to operate in IP Office Essential Edition it must have an Essential Mode license in it configuration IP Office Essential Edition systems without this license will not provide any telephony functions If this is an existing system it is recommended that you first use Manager to receives and save a copy of the current configuration locally using Save Configuration As 16h This process does not default the security settings of the system If this command is used on a system that includes components not supported by the IP Office Essential Edition currently IP500 ETR6 base cards for ETR phones the system will restart but those components will be disabled Automatic Conversion to IP Office Essential Edition This process can be applied automatically when a configuration for a new or defaulted system running in IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode is loaded This is done by selecting the Default to Standard
186. irst in the table is used e Numbers cannot be set for the Local class This class is used for any calls that do not match any other class However the ARS selectors used by this class can be changed e Outgoing Lines ARS This field indicates the ARS selectors currently associated with the Class of Call These contain the trunks that are used by the Class of Call and are set using the Select Outgoing ARS table e Select Outgoing ARS This table is used to associate ARS selectors configured on the ARS Selector 124 table with the currently selected Class of Call in the Dial Numbers Table Multiple ARS selectors can be selected and the same ARS selector can be associated with more than one Class of Call IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 126 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks 3 6 Auxiliary Equipment This menu is accessed from the System 424 page u selecting n pas ll lh These menus are used to configure the operation of a range of additional features provided by the telephone system Auxiliary Equipment Door Phone 1 Setup Door Phone 1 Assign Extension None v Dudr Phong s Extensions to be alerted Available Items N Selected Items Contact Closure Group 1 10 GE 11 Lontact osure aroup lt Contact Closure Group 2 12 Music On Hold 14 E 15 lt Remove SMDR 16 17 lt lt Remove All 18 19 Mi
187. is important to remember that callers always hear two prompts a greeting prompt and then a menu prompt In addition that may also hear the emergency greeting first if it has been activated Auto Attendant Greeting Prompts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EL The Auto Attendant Access numbers allow internal access to an auto attendant Calls can be transferred to these numbers Morning Greeting Afternoon Greeting Evening Greeting Out of Hours Greeting Emergency Greeting Action Prompts Afternoon Menu Out of Hours Menu Auto Attendant Access IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 19 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 1 4 Date and Time Setting By default the system is configured to use network time synchronization using the first analog trunk on the card installed in slot 1 of the system control unit In that mode it gets its system time and date from the information that the line provider includes as part of the caller ID information When network time synchronization is being used system in a North American locale can also be configured to apply automatic daylight saving changes If the network time synchronization method above cannot be used on a particular system it needs to be disabled The time and date are then set manually This is all done using a system administrator phone 208 1 5 Voicemail Operation All IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems include voicemail as
188. is option sets where incoming calls should alert in addition to alerting on those extension that have a line appearance button programmed for the line When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 77 group e None If set to None incoming calls will only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the line s Appearance ID e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 771 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e Unique Line Ringing Default 1 Software level 6 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for calls when alerting on an extension Calls forwarded sent to call coverage or to a hunt group will always use the line ring pattern Calls direct to an extension will use the line ringing pattern unless the user has Override Line Ring
189. ish UK English US English e If the upgraded set of prompts for the language selected are not available on the system IP Office Manager will display a warning The Add Display VM Locales 17 command can be used to upload the prompts from IP Office Manager to the system Ex Directory Default Off If selected the user is not included in the directory of users displayed on phones User CLI Default Blank This setting in only available on PBX System 1 mode systems Where supported by the line provider this CLI will be sent on outgoing calls This setting is not used with analog or SIP trunks e Changing the calling party number may not be supported by the line provider or may be an additional chargeable service It will also be subject to restrictions on what numbers can be used It is normally a requirement that the calling party number used must be a valid number for return calls to the same trunk Use of an invalid number may cause the call to be dropped or the number to be replaced by a default value Outgoing Call Bar Default Off If selected the extension user cannot make any outgoing external calls except to numbers in the Emergency Number List 55 and any Allowed Lists 53 gt of which they are a member List Memberships Information field not editable This field shows a summary of the Allowed Lists 535 AL and Disallowed Lists 54 DL to which the user belongs If the user is selected these can be edited in the Mem
190. ist by selecting Trunks Trunk Number 1 Trunk Parameters Voice ipesanca Match Echo Cancellation On w Impedance Default Echo Reduction n v Automatic Bains C Quiet Line Gains A gt D OdB Gains D gt A OdB Ring Persistency 400 Bi ms DTMF Ring Off Maximum 6000 z ms DTMF Mark 80 4 Await Dial Tone 3000 E ms DTMF Space 80 3 Intermediate Digit Pause 500 Y ms Long CLI Line O VMS Settings m EN Modem Enabled oO Delay Day 2 a Trunk Type Loop Start ICLID v Delay Night 2 M Schedule Never v Auto Attendant Auto Attendant 1 v Mains Hum Filter Mains Hum Filter Frequency Off v Trunk Parameters e Impedance Default Default Set the impedance used for the line The settings vary depending on the system s Country setting These options are only available for Bahrain Egypt Kuwait Morocco Oman Pakistan Qatar Saudi Arabia South Africa Turkey United Arab Emirates and United States For Release 8 0 they are also available for Canada e Automatic Default Yes ATM4Uv2 card only When set to Yes the Default value is used The value used for Default is set by the system Locale When set to No the Impedance value can be manually set The Impedance field contains a list of possible values e Quiet Line Default Off This setting may be required to compensate for signal loss on long lines e Digits to break dial tone Default
191. itable e Line Type Not Editable This value indicates the type of trunk The menu fields and sub menus will vary depending on the Line Type e Line Subtype For non North American locales the Line Subtype of PRI trunks is ETSI e Card Module Indicates the card slot or expansion module being used for the trunk device providing the line 1 to 4 match the slots on the front of the phone system from left to right Expansion modules are numbered from 6 upwards e Number of Channels The number of channels supported by a trunk depends on the Line Type and Line Subtype Each channels can be used for a separate external call incoming or outgoing and can be represented by a line appearance button e For a PRI card ETSI up to 30 channels are supported The number of channels should be set to match the number supported by the line provider e CRC Checking Default On This setting is only used with ETSI E1 PRI trunks Switches CRC on or off IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 92 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks e Advanced Setup This option is not used for ETSI trunks IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 93 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 PRI Trunk Channel Setup e Channel For information only not editable Not that this indicates the maximum number of channels not the number of licensed channels
192. ition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 91 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 3 1 ETSI PRI Trunk This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks If a PRI trunk with the Line Subtype of ETST is selected in the list of installed trunks its settings are displayed below the list of installed trunks e IP500 PRI Channel Licenses The IP500 PRI 1 trunk daughter card supports the use of its first 8 channels unlicensed Use of additional channels require licenses to be added to the configuration The maximum number of channels depends on the current Line Sub Type setting of the PRI trunk e ETSI PRI BRI Trunks In PBX System mode all incoming call routing is done using the trunk s DID Mapping Table The table includes a default non editable entry that routes any calls for which there is no other match to the Operator Group Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Card Module Number of Channels CRC Checking Analogue Trunk Analogue Trunk Analogue Trunk PRI 30 Universal Appearance ID Local Number DID Mapping T able DID Number Incoming CLI Destination e Installed Trunks This table displays information about the trunk cards installed in the phone system Selecting a trunk in the list displays its trunk settings below the list e Line Number Information only not ed
193. king a call some service providers will often send an authentication challenge to validate the call before it is connected This challenge requires the INVITE is re submitted with Authentication data including a network account name provided by the service provider during installation The network account name is the Auth name It can be blank in which case the Local URI is used Password Default Blank This value is provided by the SIP ITSP P Assert ID If this field is configured the channel can be used in SIPConnect Option 1 model for separating Public and Private PSTN identity Sipconnect technical recommendation v 10 section 12 1 1 You can only use Explicit CLI configurations over SIP if using Option1 model for identity In this case calls over this channel will always have a fixed P Assert ID but the From field may vary IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 115 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 4 1 SIP Trunk Advanced This menu cannot be accessed from the System 42 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks SIP Trunk Administration Advanced Setup These settings are used for configuration of individual SIP channels and more advanced SIP trunk settings Trunk Parameters E VOIP Parameters Proxy Server Address Compression mode Automatic Select w VOIP Silence Suppression Fi DNS Serv
194. l 1i00 Ring Abandon 6300 Long Ring Duration 1100 2 Ping Verify 600 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP Manager Page 109 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Channel Parameters e Channel For information only not editable Not that this indicates the maximum number of channels not the number of licensed channels usable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned This number is used to uniquely identify the telephone line or channel The number can be assigned to programmable buttons on extensions to allow the users to make and answer calls on that line or channel e Type Default Out of Service The T1 emulates the following connections Ground Start Loop Start E amp M TIE E amp M DID E amp M Switched 56K Direct Inward Dial Clear Channel 64K or Out of Service Trunks set to E amp M DID will only accept incoming calls If E amp M TIE is selected and the Outgoing Trunk Type is set to Automatic no secondary dial tone is provided for outgoing calls on this channel Dial Type Default DTMF Dial Select the dialing method required DTMF Dial or Pulse Dial e Incoming Trunk Type Default Wink Start Used for E amp M types only The handshake method for incoming calls Automatic Immediate Delay Dial or Wink Start e Outgoing Trunk Type Default Wink Start Used for E amp M types only The handshake method for outgoing calls Automatic Immediate Delay Dial or Wink Start
195. l Routing The options for routing incoming calls depend on whether the system is set to PBX or Key mode Key Mode For an incoming external calls on a line the following options control where the call is presented e Line Appearance Buttons The call will alert on any line appearance buttons that matches the line Each line has a line number which can be assigned to line appearance buttons on users phones Users can answer the call by pressing the alerting line appearance button on their phone e Number of Lines By default all analog lines in the system are assigned to line appearance buttons when the system is installed Lines are assigned for all users starting from button 03 upwards in order of line numbering e Line Assignment 7 Through individual user button programming any programmable button can be configured as a line appearance for a particular line e Coverage Destination The Coverage Destination setting of each line can be used to select whether an incoming call on that line is also presented to one of the following options in addition to alerting on any matching line appearances For PRI and BRI trunks it is not possible to know on which of the trunk s channels incoming calls will arrive Therefore in most cases the coverage destination and other settings of each line on the trunk should be set to the same values e Coverage Extension The call alerts on an intercom button of a selected line coverage extension The user s
196. l speed dial features no dial tones for the digits dialed are played to the caller IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 57 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Speed Dials Configured e Filter This option allows you to show only speed dial entries where the name number or speed dial code matches the filter value entered If there are no matches the whole set of speed dial entries is displayed e Import Allows you to import a CSV text file of speed dials Each line of the file should contain a name number and speed dial code each separated by a comma If an entry being imported matches an existing name it will overwrite the existing entry If an entry being imported matches an existing speed dial code it will be assigned an unused speed dial code Head Office 555123456 600 Acme 555654321 601 e Export This control allows you to export a CSV text file of speed dials You can then edit the file using a text editor e Comma Separated Variable text Files csv These are plain text files In addition to being exported from Manager these files can be created and edited using programs such as WordPad Manager imports and exports CSV files using UTF 8 character encoding which uses a double byte to support characters with diacritic marks such as a Other applications such as Excel may depending on the user PC settings use different encoding which will cause such characters to be removed or corrupt
197. liary Equipments Update Trunk Configurations lt Q EE Received BOOTP request For O0016cef7d0e 192 168 0 6 68 unable to process IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 42 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 2 11 The Admin Tasks List The Admin Tasks list is hidden by default but can be displayed by deselecting View Hide Admin Tasks When displayed the list provides a set of links to access all of the IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system configuration menus The Manager Application The System Page fai Avaya IP Office R7 Manager OOE00 70521A3 6 0 11046 Administrator Administrator File Edit View led Admin Tasks amp System Help System Setup List Management Speed Dial Setup License Management User Setup amp Group Management Trunks H Auxiliary Equipment amp Auto Attendant Setup ec Advanced Parameters System Details O0E 007052143 192 168 0 3 6 0 11046 PARTNER Edition Online Name IP Address Version Mode Status Feature Key None Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration What would you like to do Change Remote Administration Password Change System Settings Create Calling Lists Administer Speed Dial User Settings Configure User Button Programming Manage Hunt Groups Administer Auto Attendant Setup Auxiliary Equipments U
198. ll If on other user cannot join calls A user can switch privacy on off using a programmable button set to the Privacy 66 gt feature e Override Line Ringing Default Off Software level 6 1 For each line unique line ringing settings can be applied to be used with incoming calls They are overridden if the user s Override Line Ringing setting is enabled BST phones always override line ringing regardless of this setting IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 73 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Voicemail Settings The Automatic VMS Cover and VMS Cover Ring settings above control whether and when voicemail is used to answer calls The settings below control other aspects of voicemail operation for the user e Voicemail Code Default Blank Range Blank or 1 to 15 digits This code is used to control access to the mailbox to collect messages The mailbox user can change the code after they enter the mailbox by dialing 04 e Voicemail Email Default Blank When the user has a new message they can be emailed with an alert or a copy of the message see Voicemail Email Mode below Use this field to enter their email address in the format name domain This option requires the system to have been configured with SMTP server settings 138 e DTMF Breakout These numbers are used to allow caller s to select to be transferred to another extension instead of leaving a message e Rece
199. ll files except config cfg and keys txt files in the Optional SD card s primary folder are copied to the System SD card e WARNING After this command the system will reboot The reboot will end all calls and services in progress 5 4 9 Upgrade Configuration This command is available for systems that have an System SD card and Optional SD card installed When this command is selected any config cfg and keys txt files in the Optional SD card s primary folder are copied to the System SD card e WARNING After this command the system will reboot The reboot will end all calls and services in progress IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 184 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands Embedded File Management 5 4 10 Upload Voicemail Files Not used with IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems 5 4 11 Copy System Card This command is available for systems that have a System SD card and Optional SD card installed When this command is selected the IP Office will copy the folders and files on its System SD card to the Optional SD card Any matching files and folders already present on the Optional SD card are overwritten This process takes at least 90 minutes and can take longer 5 4 12 Configuration This command will exit Embedded File Management and return Manager to configuration editing mode Page 185 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager
200. llows the user to view the phone system s call log of all caller IDs of calls received by the system To use the button the user must be one of the three extensions configured for call ID logging e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e To access this function without a programmable button press FEATURE and then dial 23 e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 23 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 812 4 13 Caller ID Name Display A button set to this function allows the user to swap the display of caller ID name and number information on their extension On some phones after the call is answered the call display is not able to show both the caller ID name and number This function allows the user on such phones to toggle between the name and the number e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will tur
201. lues are rounded up to the nearest second 1 Call Start Call start time in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM SS For all transferred call segment this is the time the call was initiated so each segment of the call has the same call start time 2 Connected Time Duration of the connected part of the call in HH MM SS format This does not include ringing held and parked time A lost or failed call will have a duration of 00 00 00 The total duration of a record is calculated as Connected Time Ring Time Hold Time Park Time 3 Ring Time Duration of the ring part of the call in seconds e For inbound calls this represents the interval between the call arriving at the switch and it being answered not the time it rang at an individual extension e For outbound calls this indicates the interval between the call being initiated and being answered at the remote end if supported by the trunk type Analog trunks are not able to detect remote answer and therefore cannot provide a ring duration for outbound calls 4 Caller The callers number If the call was originated at an extension this will be that extension number If the call originated externally this will be the CLI of the caller if available otherwise blank 5 Direction Direction of the call I for Inbound O for outbound Internal calls are represented as O for outbound This field can be used in conjunction with Is_Internal below to determine if the call is internal external outbound
202. m 42 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 43 list by selecting Trunks If a trunk with the Line Type of Analog Trunk is selected in the list of installed trunks its settings are displayed below the list of installed trunks IP Office Manager can be used to apply an existing trunk template 86 to an analog trunk Installed Trunks Line Number Line Type Line Subtype Card Module Number of Channels T Analog Trunk 1 1 Analog Trunk 1 1 1 1 Analog Trunk Advanced Setup Analogue Trunk Setup Line Appearance ID Hold Disconnect Time S00 4 Coverage Destination None v Unique Line Ringing 1 v e Installed Trunks This table displays information about the trunk cards installed in the phone system Selecting a trunk in the list displays its trunk settings below the list e Line Number Information only not editable e Line Type Not Editable This value indicates the type of trunk The menu fields and sub menus will vary depending on the Line Type e Line Subtype This option is not used for analog trunks e Card Module Indicates the card slot or expansion module being used for the trunk device providing the line 1 to 4 match the slots on the front of the phone system from left to right Expansion modules are numbered from 6 upwards e Number of Channels The number of channels supported by a trunk depends on the Line Type and Line Subtype E
203. m into or out of night service mode or tries to access an voicemail auto attendant s emergency greeting settings e For M Series and T Series phones the system password if set is also used to control access to phone based administration from the first two extensions in the system e Log All Caller ID Calls for Users Default None selected All extensions have a call log of their last 30 calls incoming answered and missed The user can access this using a programmable button set to Call Log or their phone s Call Log button if it has one In addition up to 3 extensions can be configured to have access to the call log of the last 400 calls incoming answered and missed for the whole system These fields are used to select those users Only calls that include caller ID are included The character on the phone display indicates that there are unviewed call details in the call log IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 50 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings System Settings e Unsupervised Analog Trunk Disconnect Handling Default Off Software level 8 0 When using analog trunks various methods are used for trunk supervision ie to detect when the far end of the trunk has disconnected and so disconnect the local end of the call Depending on the locale the IP Office uses Disconnect Clear signalling and or Busy Tone Detection 14 This setting should only be enabled if it
204. m you want to move use the Add or Remove buttons to move users to and from the Se ected Users list The different types of Calling list are List Type Description Allowed Lists 534 Sets numbers that associated users can dial even when call restrictions are applied 8 lists of 10 numbers Disallowed Lists 54 Sets numbers that associated users cannot dial 8 lists of 10 numbers Emergency Number List 55 gt Sets up to 10 numbers that override all dialing restrictions at all times Account Code Entries 56 gt Sets up to 99 accounts codes and which users are required to enter an account code when making external calls IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 52 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings System Settings 3 2 1 1 Allowed Lists This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Create Calling Lists Allowed Lists This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting System List Management Allowed Lists Each allowed list contains external telephone numbers that members of the list are allowed to dial regardless of any other call barring The users allowed lists override any disallowed lists 544 of which they are also member and the user s Outgoing Call Bar 6 and Outgoing Call Restrictions 72 settings There are eight lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits 0 to 9
205. me functions the extension user IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 144 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Button Programming 4 1 Button Programming Functions Function Description Absent Message 145 A button set to this function allows the user to set or clear an absent message for display on their phone When set the absent message is also displayed on other extensions when they call the user Account Code Entry 148 A button set to this function allows the user to enter an account code prior to Yes making a call or during a call Active Line Pickup 145 A button set to this function allows the user to answer a call on a particular line It can be used if the call is ringing held or already answered by another extension Auto Dial Intercom 14 amp A button set to this function allows the user to make a call to another specified extension The button lamp will also indicate when that other extension is in use Auto Dial Other 14 A button set to this function allows the user to make a call using a number stored by the button The number can be an internal number an external number an account code or any other number The button can then be used when a number of that type needs to be dialed Call Coverage 145 A button set to this function allows the user to switch call coverage for their extension on or off The button settings include the extension number of the
206. ministration System Administration System Administration Reset Voice Mail Pwd System Administration System Administration System Administration i System Administration istributi System Administration 0 oH gt lt o o0 a D D O v o 23 2 wn HIE D D 3 a T o o a a g jx 9 9 3 3 33 3 a a Outgoing Call Restr Set System Password Toll Call Prefix System Speed Dials Automatic Extension Privacy Call Waiting Outside Conference Denial Transfer Return Ext Override Line Ringing VMS Coverage VMS Coverage Rings VMS Hunt Delay VMS Hunt Schedule Calling Group Group Call Distribution SPH PH PR PH PR PH SET HR D N ulululu lulu Aalu ww ololololn Neol olNI N DAININIADALUIRPIJOSOININIA o System omission _ __ _ line Ringing system administration Music On Ho System Administration soz System IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 209 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Category Setting Access Type Code Remote Admin Password System Administration 730 System Default System Administration 989 System Copy System Administration 732 System Shutdown System Administration 729 System Upgrade System Administration 731 System Reset System Administration 728 SSL VPN Service On Off System Administration 775 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 210 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October
207. mode option in the Manager Preferences 1t6 Only select this option if the only systems you expect to install are IP Office Essential Edition systems IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 175 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 7 6 Embedded File Management The contents of the SD memory card used by the system can be viewed through Manager For further details refer to Embedded File Management 185 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 176 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 1 7 7 Format IP Office SD Card This command allows suitable SD cards to be formatted by the Manager PC The IP500v2 supports SD cards with the following format SDHC minimum 4GB FAT32 format Single partition SDHC class2 FAT32 SPI amp SD bus Non Avaya supplied cards of the same format can be used in the IP500v2 system s Optional SD slot for additional actions such as backup WARNING All File Will Be Erased Note that this action will erase any existing files and folders on the card Once a card has been formatted the folders and files required for IP Office operation can be loaded onto the card from the Manager PC using the Recreate IP Office SD Card 17 command A WARNING Avaya supplied SD cards should not be formatted using any other method than the format commands within IP Office Manager and IP Office Sy
208. mpts for reentry of the four digit code to unlock the extension Station Unlock 156 This function can only be used by the first two extensions in the system A button set to this function allows the user to unlock any extension without needing to know the code that was used to lock that extension When the button is pressed the user is prompted to enter the number of the locked extension VMS Cover 156j A button set to this function allows the user to switch use of voicemail coverage for their extension on or off VMS Mailbox Transfer 157 A button set to this function allows the user to transfer their current call to an extension s mailbox After pressing the button the current call is put on hold and the user can then enter the target extension number to indicate the mailbox required Station Lock 156 A button set to this function allows the user to lock their extension from being used to make calls After they press the button they are prompted to enter a four digit code after which the extension is locked If the extension is already locked only Using this button the extension user can set wake up calls within the next 24 hour period for any other extension Wake Up Service 158 A Wake Up Service button can be assigned for the first extension in the system Some functions are unique ie if already assigned to a button assigning the function to another button will automatically clear the setting from the existing button
209. n any calls and services in operation will be stopped Once shutdown the system cannot be used to make or receive calls until restarted e The shutdown process takes up to a minute to complete When shutdown the CPU LED and the IP500 base card LEDs 1 and 9 if trunk daughter card fitted will flash red rapidly The memory card LEDs are extinguished Do not remove power from the system or remove any of the memory cards until the system is in the this state e To restart a system when shutdown indefinitely or to restart a system before the timed restart switch power to the system off and on again An indefinite shutdown can also be performed from either of the first two extensions in the system using the Shutdown Save All command see Phone Based Administration 2081 1 Once you have selected the IP Office system from the Select IP Office menu the System Shutdown Mode menu is displayed System Shutdown Mode x Indefinite hh mm Timed 00 10 caresi 2 Select the type of shutdown required If Indefinite is used the system can only be restarted by having its power switched off and then on again If a Timed shutdown is selected the IP Office will reboot after the set time has elapsed IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 171 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 7 4 Upgrade This command starts the Upgrade Wizard tool This tool is used to compare the software le
210. n Configuration 166 Open File 169 Organising groups 77 Outgoing call bar 52 61 Override Line Ringing 72 P Page Loudspeaker 154 Simultaneous 156 Particular Systems 172 Password administrator 47 change 47 default 31 system 47 48 70 PC requirements 29 PC running Manager 164 PC s editing 166 perform UDP 33 Phantom 72 Phone door 127 128 Pickup Active Line 148 Call 150 Idle Line 154 Pickup Group Button 155 Ping commands 26 Port 161 Preferences selecting 161 Privacy 155 Privacy Enabled 72 Processor 29 Programming button features 66 handset buttons 63 System features 70 R Read Only 35 rebooting 170 Page 213 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Recall 155 Receive Config 169 Reception 72 Redial Last Number 154 Saved Number 156 Redirecting Number 99 Regedt32 exe 166 Remote Admin password 47 Remove Selection 166 render 172 Request Login on Save 161 requests 161 Right clicking 35 Ring on transfer 129 Ring pattern 81 96 104 Ringing options 71 RJ45 cable 26 routable 164 S Save Configuration 39 Configuration onto PC 39 Configuration Received 39 Save Configuration 161 Save Configuration As 39 Save Configuration File After Load 161 Save File As dialog 161 Saved Number Redial 156 Saving Sent Configurations 39 scan 161 SD Card 44 Security selecting 166 Security Administration 166 Security Administrator 166 Select manager 31 Select Directory 172 Select IP Office 161 Selec
211. n the feature off e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 16 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 933 4 14 Calling Group A button set to this function allows the user to call or page the calling group represented by the button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 150 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Button Programming Calling Group 4 15 Call Screening This function is used to enable or disable call screening While enabled when a caller is presented to the user s voicemail mailbox if the user s phone is idle they will hear through the phone s handsfree speaker the caller leaving the message and can select to answer or ignore the call e This feature is supported on ETR6D ETR18D ETR34D 1408 1416 1608 1616 9500 Series M7310 M7310N M7208 M7208N M7324 M7324N T7208 T7316 and T7316E phones e Call screening is only applied as follows e It is only applied to calls that have audible alerted at the user s extension before going to voicemail This requires the user to have both voicemail coverage and call screening enabled and the phone s ringer not set to silent However it is not applied if the user transfers the call to voicemail e It is only applied if the user s phone is idle that is not on a call or with a call held pending transfer or conference e Calls that ring the user are then rerouted
212. naatmi6 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 IS S S ST SC S ST System B System B 192 168 0 214 IP 500 v2 7 0 11007 IP Office 7 0 11007 avpotsi6 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 dvppots bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 nas 16 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 nadcp 16 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 nadcpV2 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 naatmi6 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 1 l L1 L1 1 al L1 lt Unit Broadcast Address Backup System Files 255 255 255 255 v Upload System Files Upgrade Restart IP Phones The list area shows details of IP Office systems found by the Upgrade Wizard and the software currently held by that system The Version column details the current software each unit in the systems is running whilst the Available column shows the version of bin file Manager has available for that type of unit a indicates no file available e The check boxes are used to select which units should be upgraded Upgrading will require entry of a valid name and password for the selected IP Office system e The Validate option should remain selected wherever possible When selected the upgrade process is divided as follows transfer new software confirm transfer delete old software restart with new software If Validate is not selected the old software is deleted before the new software is transferred e The Backup system files option will cause the IP500 V2 to
213. nents control unit and its base cards for trunks and extensions that are installed in the telephone system These values are for information only and cannot be edited IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 48 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings System Settings System Parameters This section is used to configure the following system settings e System Name A name used to identify the system This is typically used to identify the configuration by the location or customer s company name Some features require the system to have a name This field is case sensitive Do not use lt gt 0 or e System Mode IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems can operate in either Key System or PBX System mode For more details see Key System or PBX System 114 Changing the mode requires the IP Office system to be restarted and will overwrite button programming e Key System The Number of Lines setting see below is used to automatically assign line appearance buttons on all extensions with programmable buttons To make external calls the user should select an available line appearance button Outbound call routing is determined by which line appearance button the user selects before dialing or by the user s automatic line selection 654 settings e PBX System No line appearances are automatically assigned The Outside Line setting see below is used to se
214. ng Name Extn201 Password Confirm Password Extn201 Full Name Extension 201 Locale Error List Config Ite Record Description A dPOffice 1 System IPOffice_1 The normal SMTP server port is 25 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 27 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode Configuration Settings When the configuration from an IP Office system running in IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode is opened in Manager Manager switches to this mode Embedded File Management 176 For systems with a memory card installed Manager can be used to view and manage the files stored on the card This is accessed through the File Advanced Embedded File Management 178 Upgrade Wizard 172 The Upgrade Wizard is a component of Manager used to upgrade the firmware run by the control unit and expansion modules within an IP Office system Visi Avaya IP Office R7 Manager 00E007052143 6 0 11046 Administrator Administrator Fle Edt view i2G d Help System Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition PARTNER Version Administration What would you like to do Change Remote Administration Password Change System Settings Create Calling Lists Administer User Settings onfigure User Button Programming Manage Hunt Groups Administer Auto Attendant etup Auxili juipmenit te Ti Va Avaya IP Office R7 Manager
215. ng by Avaya before they become applicable to any particular order or contract The company reserves the right to make alterations or amendments to the detailed specifications at its discretion The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other protective rights of Avaya or others All trademarks identified by the or are registered trademarks or trademarks respectively of Avaya Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This document contains proprietary information of Avaya and is not to be disclosed or used except in accordance with applicable agreements 2012 Avaya Inc All rights reserved Page 217 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 IP Office Basic Edition
216. ng the external number required e If the user dials without first selecting an Intercom or Line button the user s automatic line selection setting is used to determine which button if available gets used e If an external number is added to contacts when dialing it rings on the first available line from the ALS If there is no line added to the ALS the call is not made If it is an internal number it dials on the intercom PBX Mode Each phone is configured with 3 call appearance buttons 2 only on ETR phones These can be used to make both internal and external calls The dialing of an external call can be indicated by the dialing starting with a specific prefix 9 or 0 if required otherwise any number not matching an internal extension or function is assumed to be external The line used for an outgoing external call is determined by configuration settings ARS Selectors are created which can be groups of lines or specific functions using any available ISDN lines Different external number prefixes are then mapped to those ARS Selectors When a user dials an external number it is matched to a selector and uses the function and one of the lines specified by that selector For SIP trunks set to call by call mode each call by call entry also has an ARS selector settings which allows it to also be used for outgoing calls Line appearances can still be used to make and answer calls on a particular line but are not added by default All call
217. nks will work all the time and has no control over the availability of the linked pages Warranty Avaya provides a limited warranty on this product Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty In addition Avaya s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product while under warranty is available to Avaya customers and other parties through the Avaya Support Web site http www avaya com support Please note that if you acquired the product from an authorized Avaya reseller outside of the United States and Canada the warranty is provided to you by said Avaya reseller and not by Avaya Licenses THE SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS AVAILABLE ON THE AVAYA WEBSITE HTTP SUPPORT AVAYA COM LICENSEINFO ARE APPLICABLE TO ANYONE WHO DOWNLOADS USES AND OR INSTALLS AVAYA SOFTWARE PURCHASED FROM AVAYA INC ANY AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER AS APPLICABLE UNDER A COMMERCIAL AGREEMENT WITH AVAYA OR AN AUTHORIZED AVAYA RESELLER UNLESS OTHERWISE AGREED TO BY AVAYA IN WRITING AVAYA DOES NOT EXTEND THIS LICENSE IF THE SOFTWARE WAS OBTAINED FROM ANYONE OTHER THAN AVAYA AN AVAYA AFFILIATE OR AN AVAYA AUTHORIZED RESELLER AND AVAYA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO TAKE LEGAL ACTION AGAINST YOU AND ANYONE ELSE USING OR SELLING THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT A LICENSE BY INSTALLING DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR AUTHORIZING OTHERS TO DO SO YOU ON BEHALF OF YOURSELF AND THE ENTITY FOR WHO
218. nsidered busy except for calls coming from sources listed in their Do Not Disturb Exception List When a user has do not disturb in use their normal extension will give alternate dial tone when off hook Users with DND on are indicated as busy on any BLF indicators set to that user e Do Not Disturb Exception List Default Blank This is the list of telephone numbers that are still allowed when the user has do not disturb enabled For example this could be an assistant or an expected phone call Internal extension numbers or external telephone numbers can be entered If you wish to add a range of numbers you can either enter each number separately or make use of the wildcards N single digit and X multiple digits in the number For example to allow all numbers from 7325551000 to 7325551099 the DND Exception number can be entered as either 73255510XX or 73255510N Note that this list is only applied to direct calls to the user e Calls to a hunt group of which the user is a member do not use the Do Not Disturb Exceptions list IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 76 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup 3 4 Group Management This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Manage Hunt Groups This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Group Management A hunt group is a collection of users accessible through a single dir
219. ny time Setting another alarm will override any existing alarm e Blank When selected this option removes all programming from the button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 70 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup 3 3 1 3 Line Assignment This menu enables you customize lines by setting the programmable button as a line appearance button to make and answer calls on a particular line For systems operating in PBX System 4 mode buttons can also be selected for ARS selector group 124 numbers Those can be used to make calls but not to receive calls When pressed an available line in the ARS selector group is seized e Note that for systems running in Key System 49 mode a number of each users programmable buttons are automatically configured as line appearance button according to the system Number of Lines 48 setting If the system setting Number of Lines 48 is changed it may overwrite all or some of the current button programming C Set Button Programming Information Programming Features System Programming Feature Lines 01 17 Immediate 18 i Delayed Rin 03 Jelayed Ring O 04 No Ring O 05 06 Blank Qu Blan 0 Blank 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 e Lines Select the line with which the button will be associated For systems operating in Key System 49 mode the ARS Sele
220. ognized the name of the feature it licenses is shown in this field If Invalid is displayed it indicates that the Key has not been correctly entered e Status This field shows the status of the license e Unknown is shown for newly entered licenses until the configuration is sent to the phone system and then reloaded again e Valid is shown if the license key matches the SD card serial number e Invalid is shown if the license key does not match the SD card serial number e Dormant is shown if the license key is valid but is conditional on another license that is not present e Obsolete is shown if the license key is valid but the license is no longer used by the version of software installed in the phone system e Quantity Information field not editable This field indicates how many items are enabled by the license The meaning of this will vary depending on the feature being licensed e Expiry Date Information field not editable Some licenses have an expiry date for example trial licenses This field will indicate that date IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 59 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Licenses Licenses are required for some features of IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode operation The license keys are entered into the system configuration and are based on the unique Feature Key number of the SD card installed in the system and the feature being enabled e Softw
221. on modules Phone 16 and Phone 30 Avaya cannot guarantee the operation of any specific non Avaya analog phones on an IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system Analog phones can also be connected to ports on the IP500 ETR6 base card IP500 Base Cards The IP Office control unit can be fitted with up to 4 IP500 base cards Each base card can be fitted with an IP500 trunk daughter card The following IP500 base cards are supported by IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode e Digital Station Base Card DS8 This type of base card provides 8 DS ports for the connection of Avaya digital stations Maximum 3 cards supported e Analogue Extension Base Cards Phone 2 Phone 8 This type of base card provides 2 or 8 ports respectively for the connection of DTMF analog extension phones Maximum 4 cards supported e Combination Base Card Combo DS6 P2 VCM10 ATM4 and Combo DS6 P2 VCM10 BRI4 This type of base card provides 6 DS ports for the connection of Avaya digital stations and 2 PHONE ports for the connection of DTMF analog extension phones It also provides 10 voice compression channels VCM needed for SIP trunk operation The card is available in 2 variants one pre fitted with an ATM4 trunk daughter card the other pre fitted with a BRI4 trunk daughter card Maximum 2 cards supported IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 6 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features TCM Base Card TCM
222. ons to be alerted Yes Yes SMDR output IP Address TCP Port ooo e s Call Splitting for Diver s vs vs IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 201 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Auto Attendant Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Greeting Times Yes Yes Afternoon Yes Yes lt lt n es S es D S lt lt n Maximum Inactivity es S Menu Prompt es S lt lt oO Direct Dial By Number es s Follow Night Service Dial by Name Match Order es D S lt aie eh D lt D es S Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Weekly Off Emergency Greeting Yes Yes Alarm Extension Yes Yes Yes Yes Afternoon es es Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Y es Yes Destination C ve e oO lt IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 202 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools SIP Trunk Settings Function IP Office IP Office Web Phone Based Manager Manager Admin Domain Name Ys Ys NoofChanels s s Authentication Name Yes ys Password Ye w Transport Protocol Ys ys send Pore ves ve o Listen Port 1 s Ye Trunk Parameters Proxy Server Address Yes Yes DNS
223. or systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 773 LL T Syg 11 E u Default destination IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 15 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 1 2 2 2 DID Call by Call Summary The table below summarizes the supported destinations for DID call mapping and SIP call by call settings The options depend on the trunk type and the operating mode of the system Key Mode PBX Mode Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 7 Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode 76 Modem For Release 6 1 the option 76 Modem can be selected to route the call to the systems built in V32 modem 2 function This is intended for basic configuration access by system maintainers Auto Attendant For Release 6 1 any of the configured voicemail auto attendants can be selected as the call destination Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 77 Calling Group
224. ormat for example TEL 1 425 555 4567 rather than SIP URI format for example name example com This affects the From field of outgoing calls e Check OOS Default On Software level 8 0 When enabled the system will regularly check if the trunk is in service Checking that SIP trunks are in service ensures that outgoing calls are not delayed waiting for response on a SIP trunk that is not currently usable Depending on the trunk s Transport Protocol the trunks current service status is checked using the following methods e For all trunks regular OPTIONS messages are sent If no reply is received the trunk is taken out of service e For TCP trunks if the TCP connection is disconnected the trunk will be taken out of service e For trunks using DNS if the IP address is not resolved or the DNS resolution has expired the trunk is taken out of service IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 116 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks e Calls Route Via Registrar Defau t On Normally SIP REGISTER requests and INVITE requests use the same server destination This option should only be deselected when the service provider does not expect REGISTER requests to go to the same destination as the INVITE requests You should only set this under specific instruction from the service provider e Separate Registrar This field is available when Calls Route Via Registra
225. orwarding to an outside number is active at the targeted hunt group extension then the call is never forwarded and alerts the target normally If coverage is active at the targeted hunt group extension it is not followed and alerts the normal number of rings before hunting on to the next hunt group extension IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 79 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 Trunks This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 43 list by selecting Trunks The Trunks menu displays a list of the Installed Trunks excluding SIP trunks 11 When you are setting up Trunk Channels a Back option is displayed at the bottom of the Advanced Settings screen It returns you to the previous menu so that you can select another trunk line P Y During initial Trunks set up it is advisable to click Apply and save your changes before continuing with another trunk or pressing Back in the Advanced Settings screen This is because if Cancel is subsequently used you will lose all changes since your last click of Apply in the current session thus losing any setting already made for other trunks IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 80 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks 3 5 1 Analog Trunks This menu is accessed from the Syste
226. overage 149 Action Data XX YY where if XX is the source extension and YY is the destination extension A button set to this function allows the user to turn call coverage on or off If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off Call Forwarding 14 Action Data XX YY where if XX is the source extension and YY is the destination extension A button set to this function allows the user to turn call forwarding on or off If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off VMS Cover 156 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to turn voicemail coverage of their calls on or off Messaging Absent Text 14 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to set or clear an absence text message When set the message is displayed on their extension and also on other extensions when they call the user If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off Voicemail Collect 154 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to access the voicemail to collect messages Message Alert Notification 154 Action Data A button set to this function allows the user to inspect the current state of another user s message waiting lamp It can only be used in conjunction with other users for which this user has Auto Dial ICM buttons configured IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8
227. ovided by the service provider during installation The network account name is the Auth name It can be blank in which case the Local URI is used e Password Default Blank This value is provided by the SIP ITSP e P Assert ID If this field is configured the channel can be used in SIPConnect Option 1 model for separating Public and Private PSTN identity Sipconnect technical recommendation v 10 section 12 1 1 You can only use Explicit CLI configurations over SIP if using Option1 model for identity In this case calls over this channel will always have a fixed P Assert ID but the From field may vary IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 114 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks Call by Call Table These settings are used to match calls received on SIP trunks channels set to Incoming Call by Call above For systems operating in Key System mode the default entry is used for all calls for which there is no other match and is fixed to route those calls to the Operator Group ARS This setting is only shown for PBX System 1 mode systems For those systems each call by call entry can be assigned to an ARS Selector 124 number That selector number can then be used as the destination for outgoing calls Local URI The user part of the SIP URI This specifies the contents of the FROM field when making a call sending an INVITE Display Name Default
228. oviding the line 1 to 4 match the slots on the front of the phone system from left to right Expansion modules are numbered from 6 upwards e Number of Channels The number of channels supported by a trunk depends on the Line Type and Line Subtype Each channels can be used for a separate external call incoming or outgoing and can be represented by a line appearance button e For a BRI card 2 channels are supported for each physical connector 2 or 4 provided by the BRI trunk card e Advanced Setup 9 This hot link option calls up a further window that is used to display and edit additional settings for the selected trunk and its trunk channels IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 87 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 BRI Trunk Channel Setup e Channel For information only not editable Not that this indicates the maximum number of channels not the number of licensed channels usable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned This number is used to uniquely identify the telephone line or channel The number can be assigned to programmable buttons on extensions to allow the users to make and answer calls on that line or channel e Local Number Information only Use to any associated number for test calls to the line e Anonymous Default Off If selected withhold sending caller ID information on outgoing calls e Coverage Destination Default None System Mode Key System Th
229. pdate Trunk Configurations Received BOOTP request For O0016cef7d0e 192 168 0 6 68 unable to process IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Please review the current IP Office Set i Hardware Installed Control Unit IP 500 V2 Internal Modules ETR6 DIGSTA8 Unknown Expansion Modules NONE Feature Key None Serial Number 00600705213 System Settings IP Address 182 158 0 3 Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 System Locale United States US English Number assigned to first Extension 10 Number of Extensions on System 22 Features Configured Page 43 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 2 12 Creating a Configuration File Manager can be used to create a configuration file for a system Ay A configuration created offline should only ever be loaded to a system with the matching hardware configuration Doing otherwise may cause system faults e Once the system has been installed changing the order or combination of cards will require the system configuration to be defaulted 1 Close any current configuration open in Manager 2 Select Create an Offline Configuration or File Offline Create New Config ai Avaya IP Office R7 Manager File Edit View Tools Help i 23 dd Offline Configuration Creation Please specify System Parameters Which type of IP Office Units would you like to deploy Configuration IP Office Quick Mode System Units System Mo
230. pe serial number feature key location or other specific designation or to be provided by End User to Avaya through electronic means established by Avaya specifically for this purpose Copyright Except where expressly stated otherwise no use should be made of materials on this site the Documentation s and Product s provided by Avaya All content on this site the documentation s and the product s provided by Avaya including the selection arrangement and design of the content is owned either by Avaya or its licensors and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws including the sui generis rights relating to the protection of databases You may not modify copy reproduce republish upload post transmit or distribute in any way any content in whole or in part including any code and software Unauthorized reproduction transmission dissemination storage and or use without the express written consent of Avaya can be a criminal as well as a civil offense under the applicable law Third Party Components Certain software programs or portions thereof included in the Product may contain software distributed under third party agreements Third Party Components which may contain terms that expand or limit rights to use certain portions of the Product Third Party Terms Information regarding distributed Linux OS source code for those Products that have distributed the Linux OS source code and identifying the co
231. phantom extension cannot be configured as any other extension type ie loudspeaker door phone fax machine or standard extension e A phantom extension cannot be configured as a night service alert extension e A phantom extension cannot be configured as a hotline extension e A phantom extension cannot be added to a hunt group pickup group or calling group e A phantom extension specified as the destination for call forwarding or follow me is ignored Instead calls will continue to alert at the forwarded user e A phantom extension specified as the destination for another extension s call coverage is ignored Instead calls will continue to alert at the covered extension IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 22 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features Phantom Extensions 1 8 One Touch Transfer Release 6 1 and higher supports one touch transfer operation with a number of different button types With a call currently connected the user can start the transfer process by pressing a button pre configured for the destination rather than having to first press TRANSFER The button types that support this operation are listed below Buttons programmed for voice or page calls can be used e Auto Dial ICM e Auto Dial ICM Page e Group Calling Ring e Group Calling Page e Group Hunting Ring e Group Hunting Page e Simultaneous Page 1 With a currently connected call the u
232. ption Breakout DTMF 0 Default Blank Sets the number to which a caller is transferred if they press O Intuity mailbox mode or O IP Office mailbox mode while listening to the mailbox greeting e Breakout DTMF 2 Default Blank Sets the number to which a caller is transferred if they press 2 Intuity mailbox mode or 2 IP Office mailbox mode while listening to the mailbox greeting e Breakout DTMF 3 Default Blank Sets the number to which a caller is transferred if they press 3 Intuity mailbox mode or 3 IP Office mailbox mode while listening to the mailbox greeting e Voicemail Email Mode Default Off This setting is used if an email address for the user has been set above and the system is configured with SMTP server settings 138 It sets whether the user receives an email when they have a new voicemail message and the type of email Off Switches off the use of email for new message alerts Copy Send an email to the user s email address with the voicemail message attached The method leaves the message in the user s voicemail mailbox e Forward Send an email to the user s email address with the voicemail message attached This method deletes the message from the user s voicemail mailbox e Alert Send an email alert about the new message but do not attach the message to the email Equipment Type e Loudspeaker Paging Select this option for an extension connected to a paging amplifier Only one such ext
233. pyright holders of the Third Party Components and the Third Party Terms that apply to them is available on the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Copyright Preventing toll fraud Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party for example a person who is not a corporate employee agent subcontractor or is not working on your company s behalf Be aware that there can be a risk of toll fraud associated with your system and that if toll fraud occurs it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services Avaya fraud intervention If you suspect that you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical assistance or support call Technical Service Center Toll Fraud Intervention Hotline at 1 800 643 2353 for the United States and Canada For additional support telephone numbers see the Avaya Support Web site http support avaya com Suspected security vulnerabilities with Avaya products should be reported to Avaya by sending mail to securityalerts avaya com Trademarks Avaya and Aura are trademarks of Avaya Inc The trademarks logos and service marks Marks displayed in this site the documentation s and product s provided by Avaya are the registered or unregistered Marks of Avaya its affiliates or other third parties Users are not permitted to use such Marks without prior written consent from Avaya or such third party whic
234. que Line Ringing EMENNNECTITCHNENENEL IE el B Dut Of Service None Channel Appearance ID Admin Local Number Anonymous Coverage Destination Out Of Service None Out Of Service Fi None DID Mapping Table DID Number Incoming CLI Destination e Installed Trunks This table displays information about the trunk cards installed in the phone system Selecting a trunk in the list displays its trunk settings below the list e Line Number Information only not editable e Line Type Not Editable This value indicates the type of trunk The menu fields and sub menus will vary depending on the Line Type e Line Subtype For North American locales the Line Subtype of PRI trunks is set to either PRI or T1 The setting used should match the service supported by the line provider e Card Module Indicates the card slot or expansion module being used for the trunk device providing the line 1 to 4 match the slots on the front of the phone system from left to right Expansion modules are numbered from 6 upwards e Number of Channels The number of channels supported by a trunk depends on the Line Type and Line Subtype Each channels can be used for a separate external call incoming or outgoing and can be represented by a line appearance button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 96 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks e For a PRI card the n
235. quire a button that includes lights However if set on a button with lights the green LED will match whether the function is on or off e If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 07 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 83 4 29 Recall A button set to this function allows the user to send a recall or hook flash signal e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 155 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 4 30 Saved Number Redial A button set to this function allows the user to save the number dialed during a call and to redial that number when idle This can be used when the number dialed does not answer e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e For analog telephone devices when using last number redial saved number redial system speed dial and personal speed dial features no dial tones for the digits dialed are played to the caller 4 31 Simultaneous Page A button set to this function allows the user to make a page call to both the loudspeaker ex
236. r Page 118 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks e Auto Request to use REFER if possible for call transfers that use this trunk for both legs of the transfer If REFER is not supported transfer the call via the system as for the Never setting below e Never Do not use REFER for call transfers that use this trunk for both legs of the transfer The transfer can be completed but will use 2 channels on the trunk e Outgoing Default Auto Select whether REFER can or should be used when attempt to transfer an outgoing call on the trunk results in an incoming call on another channel on the same trunk This uses system resources and may incur costs for the duration of the transferred call The options available are the same as for the Incoming setting e Caller ID from From Header Default Off Software Level 8 1 FP1 Incoming calls can include caller ID information in both the From field and in the PAI fields When this option is selected the caller ID information in the From field is used rather than that in the PAI fields e Send From In Clear Default Off Software Level 8 1 FP1 When selected the user ID of the caller is included on the From field This applies even if the caller has selected to be or is configured to be anonymous though their anonymous state is honored in other fields used to display the caller identity IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Mana
237. r is deselected It is used to enter the address of the SIP server that should be used for registration You should only set this under specific instruction from the service provider e Call Routing Method Default Request URI Software level 8 0 This field allows selection of which part of the incoming SIP information should be used for the incoming number The options are to match either the Request URI or the To Header element provided with the incoming call e Name Priority Defau t Favour Trunk Software level 8 0 For SIP trunks the caller name displayed on an extension can either be that supplied by the trunk or one obtained by checking for a number match in the system speed dials This setting determines which method is used by the line Select one of the following options e System Default Use the system s Default Name Priority setting Advanced Parameters 138 e Favour Trunk Display the name provided by the trunk For example the trunk may be configured to provide the calling number or the name of the caller The system should display the caller information as it is provided by the trunk e Favour Directory Search for a number match in the system speed dials The first match is used and overrides the name provided by the SIP line If no match is found the name provided by the line is used e Association Method Default By Source IP address Software level 8 0 This field sets the method by which a SIP line
238. r rrr ra 16 49 04 00 00 08 0 13 0 9416 9416 1 1000067 0 E13 Extn13 V11002 CO Channel 100 2 0 0 vor rrr 16 48 37 00 00 13 0 0 1 1000064 0 E207 Extn17 V11003 CO Channel 100 3 0 0 v n n rrr 16 48 58 00 00 13 0 0 9416 9416 0 1000066 0 V11001 CO Channel 100 1 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 Extn13 U Cfd Ex Two Outgoing External Calls Transferred Together This scenario shows an outgoing call which is then transferred to another outgoing call 2009 02 19 11 13 26 00 00 06 0 13 0 9403 9403 0 1000012 1 E13 Extn13 T9001 Line 1 0 8 0 n a 0 U Extn13 2009 02 19 11 13 36 00 00 02 0 13 0 8404 8404 0 1000013 0 E13 Extn13 T9002 Line 2 0 0 0 n a 0 U X P Extn13 2009 02 19 11 13 26 00 00 11 0 8404 1 404 0 1000012 0 T9002 Line 2 0 T9001 Line 1 0 0 0 n a 0 LINE Xfd 0 1038 0 13 Alog Trunk 2 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 193 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Chapter 7 Other System Administration Tools IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager ition e Page 194 IP Office Basic Ed Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools 7 Other System Administration Tools These tables list the functions and configuration settings accessible from the system administrator tools They do not cover user administration of their own settings which can also be done using phone based administration or IP Office We
239. r valid authorization or O for invalid authorization 19 AuthCode This field shows either the authorization code used or n a if no authorization code was used 20 User Charged This and the following fields are used for ISDN Advice of Charge AoC The user to which the call charge has been assigned This is not necessarily the user involved in the call 21 Call Charge The total call charge calculated using the line cost per unit and user markup 22 Currency The currency This is a system wide setting set in the IP Office configuration 23 Amount at Last User Change The current AoC amount at user change 24 Call Units The total call units 25 Units at Last User Change The current AoC units at user change 26 Cost per Unit This value is set in the IP Office configuration against each line on which Advice of Charge signaling is set The values are 1 10 000th of a currency unit For example if the call cost per unit is 1 07 a value of 10700 should be set on the line 27 Mark Up Indicates the mark up value set in the IP Office configuration for the user to which the call is being charged The field is in units of 1 100th for example an entry of 100 is a markup factor of 1 28 External Targeting Cause This field indicates who or what caused the external call and a reason code For example U FU indicates that the external call was caused by the Forward Unconditional setting of a User Reason eT 3 Hunt Group EN DESSEN
240. r voicemail prompts and phone displays if the language is available The language settings can also be set separately for each user 614 and for each auto attendant 139 service e The options are Arabic Brazilian Portuguese Canadian French Cantonese Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Korean Mandarin Norwegian Portuguese Russian Spanish Spanish Argentinean Spanish Latin Spanish Mexican Swedish UK English US English e If the upgraded set of prompts for the language selected are not available on the system IP Office Manager will display a warning The Add Display VM Locales 17 command can be used to upload the prompts from IP Office Manager to the system e Number of Lines Default 5 or if installed the number of analog trunks when the system is first started This option is only available for systems with their System Mode see above set to Key System For phones with programmable buttons those buttons can be configured as line appearance buttons that each match a particular incoming line This setting controls how many of buttons on every user s phone are automatically allocated as line appearance buttons The assignment is done starting from button 03 upwards in order of the lines available eI Warning If this value is changed all existing line appearance buttons and automatic line selection 65 settings are overwritten The existing functions on other programmable buttons are also overwritten if they ar
241. rage for their extension on or off The button settings include the extension number of the extension providing coverage When on calls to the user that ring unanswered for the user s number of coverage rings then also start ringing at the call coverage extensions When on a call to the extension that ring unanswered for the extension s Call Coverage Rings setting will also start alerting on the covering extension specified by the button If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button This function does not require a button that includes lights However if set on a button with lights the green LED will match whether the function is on or off If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off Programming the destination and or the originator onto the call coverage button is optional To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 20 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 932 4 9 Call Forwarding A button set to this function allows the user to redirect all their calls to another number Extensions with Remote Call Forwarding enabled can also forward calls externally by specifying a personal speed dial as the destination If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will a
242. ration by dialing 9000 or through the Modem Enabled option shown in the trunk s advanced setup settings When operating as a modem the line cannot be used for normal voice calls For Release 6 1 and higher the modem functionality can also be accessed as extension 76 This can be used as the destination in an auto attendant menu in the DID mapping SIP Call by Call tables of trunks This allows remote access on lines other than the first analog line Remote access requires entry of the user name and password used for IP Office Manager as the connection name and password 1 10 SIP Trunks The IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode can support SIP trunks through its LAN connection These are configured using IP Office Manager they cannot be managed through phone based administration In order to support SIP trunks the system must include the following resources e SIP Trunk Licenses These licenses are used to configure the number of simultaneous SIP trunk calls supported up to a maximum of 20 A IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system supports 3 channels without licenses e Voice Compression Channels These are required to convert between the audio compression methods used for IP telephony and those used for analog and digital trunks Each IP500 Combination card up to 2 installed in the system provides 10 voice compression channels for the system One voice compression channel is used for each SIP call IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mo
243. re selecting the menu options for the morning afternoon evening or out of hours The Menu Prompt setting see above controls whether separate menu prompts are used for each time state or not IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 134 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Auto Attendant Setup e Emergency Greeting Software level 6 1 Using the Transfer to Greeting action from an auto attendant an emergency greeting can be recorded and activated or deactivated When active the emergency greeting is played to callers in advanced of any other auto attendant greeting The Record Greeting number indicates the internal number that can be dialed to hear the current greeting and record a new greeting Use of this feature requires the system password to be set When an emergency greeting message is active a message to that effect is also displayed on the Alarm Extension see below e Alarm Extension Default 10 Software level 6 1 When the auto attendant s Emergency Greeting is active see above a warning message is also displayed on the extension indicated by this field IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 135 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Setup Auto Attendant Actions This table allows you to assign which key presses have associated actions for the auto attendant e Type Software level 6 1 The auto attendant m
244. requested reboot the PC IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 30 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 2 2 Starting Manager The Manager Application Installing Manager 1 Select Start Programs IP Office Manager e If the PC has firewall software installed you may be prompted as to whether you want to allow this program to access the network Select Yes or OK 2 When the Manager application starts it briefly displays a splash screen It will then perform several possible actions and then presents the welcome screen 3 By default the application will automatically scans the local network for an IP Office system This behavior can be disabled in the Manager application preferences 164 in which case the default welcome page is displayed see Simplified View 405 a If only one system is found and it is current Administrator account password is password Manager will automaticall Vil Avaya IP Office R7 Manager File Edit View Tools Help 3 Admin Tasks System A System Setup List Management Change Remote Administration Password load and display the configuration from that system Welcome to IP Office Essential Edition QUICK Version Administrati Please review the current IP Office Setup Internal Modules COMBO6210 ATM4 Speed Dial Setup Change System Settings Create Calling Lists 3 User Setup Administer Speed Dial m Group Mana
245. rity Settings After Send Save Configuration File After Load Backup Files on Send Backup File Extension BAK Number of Backup Files to keep Unlimited C Enable Application Idle Timer 5 mins Secure Communications Manager Certificate Checks Low Medium High Certificate ESSEESELLLSALLLLLLILLOL offered to IP nd e Request Login on Save Default On By default a valid user name and password is required to receive a configuration from an IP Office and also to send that same configuration back to the IP Office Deselecting this setting allows Manager to send the configuration back without having to renter user name and password details This does not apply to a configuration that has been saved on PC and then reopened This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administration rights e Close Configuration Security Settings After Send Default On When selected the open configuration file or security settings are closed after being sent back to the IP Office system e Save Configuration File After Load Default On When selected a copy of the configuration is saved to Manager s working directory 164 The file is named using the IP Office s system name and the suffix cfg This setting can only be changed when a configuration has been opened using a user name and password with Administrator rights or security administr
246. rmal daytime operation e If you reassign the Night Service Button it is removed from the button where it was previously assigned e If you program a System Password 484 you must enter the password when turning Night Service on or off In addition when Night Service is on users in the Night Service Group can dial only numbers on the Emergency Phone Number List 55 and marked system speed dial numbers without entering the System Password Night Service with a System Password is useful for controlling unauthorized use of phones after hours e If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule determines when outside calls should ring voicemail The status of the Night Service Button tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode e The Night Service Button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to a system reset 170 being used e Night Service is unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 21 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 1 7 Phantom Extensions For Release 6 1 and higher extension users are created in the system configuration for all users regardless of whether they are matched by physical extension ports available Those user extensions without a physical port are referred to as phantom extensions The main purpose of phantom extensions is to provide voicema
247. rror Add Display VM locales can then be used to upload the prompts for the required language in order to correct the error You can reload languages that are already installed on the System SD card For example you may want to reload the languages if new prompts have been added in a maintenance release To reload existing languages upgrade the system File Advanced Upgrade 1723 with the Upload System Files option checked You can also choose Upload System Files from the Embedded File Management utility File Advanced Embedded File Management 174 The Recreate IP Office SD Card 17 command can be used to locally load all available languages onto an SD card IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 179 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 8 Exit The File Exit command exits the Manager application IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 180 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 2 View 5 2 1 Toolbars This command allows selection of which toolbars should be shown or hidden in configuration mode A tick mark is displayed next to the name of those toolbars that are currently shown 5 2 2 Tool Tip This setting control whether additional tooltips are displayed when Manager is running in IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 5 2 3 Advanced View When there is no configuration loaded in Manager this
248. runks 3 5 4 SIP Trunk Administration This menu cannot be accessed from the System 42 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 425 list by selecting Trunks SIP Trunk Administration This menu is used to add SIP trunks to the phone system configuration Before adding any SIP trunks the system must be configured for general SIP operation through the STUN Settings for the Network section of the Advanced Parameters 136 settings e SIP Trunk Channel Licenses The system can support 3 simultaneous SIP calls without needing licenses Additional simultaneous calls up to 20 in total require the addition of licenses 59 to the configuration e VCM Channels Note that for SIP calls the system also requires VCM channels For a IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system those are provided by installing IPB00 Combination base cards Each of these cards provides 10 VCM channels SIP Trunk Setup Authentication No Of Transport Listen Descriptive P d Name SESS Channels Protocol Port ET Domain Name Display Name Local URI Anonymous poean a Ae Bothway Bothway v lt Not yet configured Bothway lt Not yet configured Registration Authentication Local URI Display Name Destination Required Name Password P Assert ID IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 111 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 SIP Trunk Setup e Descriptive Name The name
249. s Unit Broadcast Address The process above is called discovery A UDP broadcast will not be routed to other networks and subnets Therefore to find IP Office systems not located on the same subnet as the Manager PC the following other options are supported e Specific Addressing The Unit Broadcast Address shown on the Select IP Office menu can be changed to the specific IP address of the required system A single address is routable and so can be used to discover an IP Office system on another subnet e TCP Discovery Address Ranges IP Office 3 2 systems support discovery by TCP as well as UDP To support this a set of TCP addresses and address ranges can be specified for use by the Select IP Office discovery process e Known Units Discovery The IP Office 4 0 Q2 2007 maintenance release adds supports for a system whereby IP Office Manager can write the details of systems it discovers to a file The list of systems in that file can then be used for access to those systems See Known Units Discovery 354 e DNS Lookup IP Office Manager 6 2 can be configured to locate IP Office systems using DNS name lookup This requires the IP Office systems on a customer network to be added as names on the customer s DNS server and the Manager PC to be configured to use that server for DNS name resolution The use of DNS is configured through File Preferences Discovery 16A IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Pag
250. s Extension Line 01 Line 02 Line 03 Line 04 Intercom 1 Intercom 2 Clear ALS Graphical Mode Known phone type IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 64 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup User Buttons e User This drop down list is used to select the extension user whose programmed buttons are displayed for editing e Handset When a configuration is loaded from the telephone system at Manager 264 start up if the type of phone currently plugged into the extension port is recognized the menu switches to graphical mode and displays a picture of the phone If the phone type is not known the menu can either be used in non graphical mode or a phone type can be selected from the drop down list to switch to graphical mode Copy and Print This section of the menu allows you to copy the current user s button program settings to other extension users e Available Users Select the users to which you want apply either of the actions below e Copy Feature Buttons Displays a list of users and allows you to select which the users to which you want the current users buttons copied e Print Labels If you have the DESI label printing application installed on the computer this control offers a list of connected printers and transfers the information required to print labels to the selected machine Buttons This table displays the list of features programm
251. s are used during the times indicated in Greeting Times for morning The Record Greeting number indicates the internal number that can be dialed to hear the current greeting and record a new greeting e Afternoon When this Profile is selected the afternoon greeting and afternoon menu options are used during the times indicated in Greeting Times for afternoon The Record Greeting number indicates the internal number that can be dialed to hear the current greeting and record a new greeting e Evening When this Profile is selected the evening greetings and evening menu options are used during the times indicated in Greeting Times for evening The Record Greeting number indicates the internal number that can be dialed to hear the current greeting and record a new greeting e Out of office hours For times not covered by the morning afternoon or evening settings the Out of Hours greetings and Out of Hours menu options are used If Follow Night Service is selected this also applies when the system is put into night service The Record Greeting number indicates the internal number that can be dialed to hear the current greeting and record a new greeting e Menu options This greeting should details the options available to callers after hearing the auto attendant greeting The Record Greeting number indicates the internal number that can be dialed to hear the current greeting and record a new greeting Note that number changes depending on whether you a
252. s go through intercom This is true for internal and external calls ARS If you enable a prefix for external numbers then you must be manually modify the number stored in contacts If the number was not added before the prefix option in the Manager was selected you have to add the number with the selected prefix Dialing Restrictions In both modes the system uses a number of methods to control the external numbers which users are allowed to call e Allowed Number Lists Disallowed Number Lists These lists are used in define numbers that can or cannot be dialed Users are then associated with the different lists Allowed Numbers Each allowed list contains external telephone numbers that members of the list are allowed to dial regardless of any other call barring The users allowed lists override any disallowed lists 54 of which they are also member and the user s Outgoing Call Bar 6t and Outgoing Call Restrictions 725 settings There are eight lists each containing up to 10 numbers Each number can use the telephone dialing digits O to 9 4 and can be up to 28 digits long You can also use the character as a single digit wildcard Disallowed Numbers Each disallowed list contains external telephone numbers that users who are members of the list are not allowed to dial Numbers in the disallowed lists of which a user is a member are overridden if they also appear in the allowed numbers lists emergency number list of which t
253. s normally a requirement that the calling party number used must be a valid number for return calls to the same trunk Use of an invalid number may cause the call to be dropped or the number to be replaced by a default value e The default ARS Selector entry 66 is set to Local number default It uses the user s User CLI if set e ISDN Standard Call This type of selector is used to select an available ISDN channel for the call e ISDN Number Withheld This type of selector is used to withhold any outgoing local number information on an ISDN call For a call routed to this ARS selector an available ISDN channel is used with the calling party element of the Q 931 setup set to withheld e SIP Call by Call These entries appear when entries are created in a SIP trunk s Call by Call 11 table They cannot be edited through the ARS Selectors form By having an associated ARS Selector number the entry can be selected as the destination for specific out going calls e Details This field show either the lines currently selected for use with the ARS selector or the local number setting for the calling party number e Select Lines This table is used to add or remove lines from the currently selected ARS selector if its Type is set to Group of Lines IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 125 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 5 2 Dial Numbers This menu cannot be accessed from the System 424 pa
254. s used Ring on Transfer Default Active If selected callers being transferred hear ringing during the transfer process If not selected the caller will hear music on hold Recall Timer Duration Defau t 500 Range 25 to 800 milliseconds This is the flash pulse width used for analog trunks and T1 trunks Toll Call Prefix Defau t 0 or 1 Required Before Area Code Allows selection between O or 1 Required Before Area Code or Area Code and Number Only Companding Law The IP Office system is defaulted to A Law or U Law by the SD Feature Key dongle inserted into the unit or by the locale selected when creating an off line configuration Typically U Law is used in North American locales A Law is used in most other locales U Law is also called Mu Law or p Law For some installations it may be necessary to change this setting if advised by the external line provider e Note ETR6 cards are not supported for systems running in A Law mode IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 139 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 STUN Settings for Network These settings are used if SIP trunks are added to the phone system s configuration using the SIP Trunk Administration 11 menu These settings are necessary to allow SIP connections from the network on which the phone system is attached to reach the public network on which the SIP provider is located The following fields can be completed either man
255. se of busy tone detection to clear calls is normally set to match the requirements of the system locale These settings can be used to change the settings if required for a particular site e WARNING Changes to these settings will require the system to restart when the changes are saved e Mode Default System Frequency If set to System Frequency the settings used are the default settings for the system locales To change the settings select either Single Frequency or Dual Frequency to match the line providers requirements e Single Frequency If the Mode is set to Single Frequency set the frequency e Dual Frequency If the Mode is set to Dual Frequency set the frequencies IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 142 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Chapter 4 Button Programming IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 143 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 4 Button Programming Most Avaya phones have buttons to which functions can be assigned For some phones additional buttons can also be added by attaching a button module to the phone Normally buttons are numbered from 01 from left to right starting from the bottom row up However for 1400 and 9500 Series telephones this changes if the System Mode 494 is set to PBX System in which case buttons are numbered from 01 from left to right starting from the top row downwards Defaul
256. sed on phone displays and for voicemail prompts If the setting is changed it will cause the settings of all users and auto attendants to change to match The system language can be changed from the Country setting using the separate Language setting below e The options are Argentina Australia Bahrain Belgium Brazil Canada Chile China Customize Denmark Egypt Finland France Germany Greece Hong Kong Hungary Iceland India Italy Korea Kuwait Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Oman Pakistan Peru Poland Portugal Qatar Russia Saudi Arabia Singapore South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Turkey United Arab Emirates United States Venezuela e When Default is selected the following additional fields are available e Tone Plan Default Tone Plan 1 Select a tone plan to be used for different ringing signals such as dial tone and ring tone e CLI Type Default FSK V23 Set the method for passing caller ID information to analog extensions The options are DTMF FSK Bell 202 or FSK V23 e Busy Tone Detection Default Off Enable or disable the use of busy tone detection for call clearing e WARNING Changing the system language requires the system to be rebooted when the changes are sent back to the system e For each user their language settings can be changed using the user s Language 615 setting This affects the language used on their phone s display and for mailbox access prompts e For ea
257. sented to the user s voicemail mailbox if the user s phone is idle they will hear through the phone s handsfree speaker the caller leaving the message and can select to answer or ignore the call A button set to this function allows the user to drop a call from a conference E Contact Closure 1 155 A button set to this function allows the user to operate the system s contact closure 1 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group Contact Closure 2 155 A button set to this function allows the user to operate the system s contact closure 2 connection The user must be a member of the contact closure group Do Not Disturb 15 A button set to this function allows the user to set the extension s do not disturb on or off Hot Dial 155 A button set to this function allows the user to dial a number without first going off Yes hook or pressing the SPEAKER button Automatic line selection 695 is used to select a line Hunt Group 15A A button set to this function allows the user to call or page the hunt group represented by the button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 145 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Function Description Idle Line Pickup 15A A button set to this function allows the user to seize a line if that line is idle This allows the user to access line for which they do not have a line appearance button on their extension Last Number Redial 155
258. ser starts the transfer by pressing the button programmed for the transfer destination 2 The system seizes an intercom button using the user s automatic line selection 654 setting If no intercom buttons are available the button press is ignored 3 When an intercom button is seized the system puts the connected call on hold pending transfer and makes the voice or page call to the transfer destination 4 The user can switch between calls using the appropriate intercom and or line appearance for each call e If the transfer destination is busy then the transfer cannot be completed The user should press the appropriate appearance button for the held call to reconnect to the caller 5 The user can complete the transfer by going on hook replacing the handset pressing SPEAKER or pressing HEADSET depending on how they were handling the call being transferred or pressing TRANSFER or selecting the Complete soft key on the display e Calls transferred using one touch transfer are still subject to voicemail coverage or transfer return in the same way as normal transferred calls e Using this feature and trying to complete a transfer to a door phone or a loudspeaker paging extension is not allowed The transfer attempt is dropped and the original call remains on hold 1 9 Modem Access Support The first analog line port in any system can be used for V32 modem access The line is switched between modem operation and normal voice call ope
259. sion from ringing LEDs LCD still flash When Do Not Disturb is on external callers hear ringing while internal callers hear a busy signal You should use Do Not Disturb only if someone answers external calls for your extension when you do not answer them You can configure do not disturb exceptions These are numbers that are still able to call even when do not disturb is on e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e To access this function without a programmable button press FEATURE and then dial 01 e Do not disturb overrides call forwarding e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and dial 01 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 85 on or 85 off IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 153 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 4 20 Hot Dial e This option is not used by DS and BST phones Those phone have hot dialing always switched on e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e To access this function
260. ss 192 168 42 1 Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 System Locale United States US English Number assigned to first Extension 10 Number of Extensions on System 8 Features Confiqured Daylight Saving Enabled System Trunks per phone 4 Licenses Installed NONE ETR Digital Extensions Connected NONE Hunt Group Extensions Pickup Group Extensions Calling Group Extensions Night Service Group Extensions NONE Assigned Mode QUICK E dition Allowed List Extensions Status Offline Disallowed List Extensions Feature Key N A Name IPOffice 3 IP Address 192 168 42 1 Version 7 0 0 Important IP Office is an Offline Editor When a system configuration is loaded into Manager it is a configuration file copied to the Manager PC Any changes made to that configuration have no effect on the system until the copy is saved back to the system from the Manager PC IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 26 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application Manager Modes The menus and options displayed by Manager vary depending on the actions you are performing Manager can run in the following modes Simplified View 40 This is Managers default mode when no IP Office configuration has been opened Advanced View This mode can be selected instead of the Simplified view when no configuration is loaded It is not normally used for IP Office
261. standard By default up to 2 calls can simultaneously use voicemail services By adding licenses this can be increased up to 6 simultaneous calls When Do Calls Go To a User s Mailbox If a user has voicemail enabled VMS Cover set to Enabled the default calls directed to ring at that user s extension go to the user s voicemail after having rung for the time set by the user s Voicemail Coverage Rings setting approximately 15 seconds by default For incoming external calls this will apply if the user is set as the line s Coverage Destination e The above does not apply for calls altering just on a line appearance button that the user has assigned or alerting the user as part of a hunt group e There are number of methods for a user to switch their VMS Cover setting on or off through their mailbox through the phone menus or using a VMS Cover 155 button e A VMS Transfer 15 button can be configured to let a user transfer calls directly to the mailbox of other users When Do Calls Go to an Auto Attendant The IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode voicemail supports the configuration of up to 9 auto attendant services to answer and redirect calls If an auto attendant has been configured it can be used to answer calls as follows e Immediate Auto Attendant Service One of the auto attendants can be specified as the Coverage Destination for a particular line The call is presented immediately to that auto attendant e Delayed Optional A
262. stem Status Application Formatting the cards using any other method will remove the feature key used for IP Office licensing from the card 1 Insert the SD card into a reader slot on the Manager computer 2 Using Manager select File Advanced Format IP Office SD Card 3 Select IP Office A Law or IP Office U Law This selection just sets the card label shown when viewing the card details It does not affect the actual formatting Select the label that matches the files set you will be placing on the card The other options available are not used for a IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode system 4 Browse to the card location and click OK 5 The status bar at the bottom of Manager will display the progress of the formatting process 6 When the formatting is complete you can use the Recreate IP Office SD Card 17 command to load the IP Office folders and files onto the card from the Manager PC 5 1 7 8 Recreate IP Office SD Card This command can be used with a read writeable SD card on the IP Office Manager PC It copies the files and folders used by an system when starting It updates the card with the version of those files installed with the IP Office Manager application It includes the binary files for the system external expansion modules and phones The command also copies all language prompt sets used by Embedded Voicemail If the card contains dynamic system files such as SMDR records they are temporarily backed up by IP Offi
263. t All Units Deselect All Units Select PBX and its modules Deselect PBX and its modules Upgrade v Validate Known Unis Upgrade ll Cancel IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 28 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 The Manager Application 2 1 Installing Manager The IP Office Administration suite consists of a number of applications for IP Office installers and maintainers e O System Monitor Install e O Manager Install lt e O System Status Application Install e O Call Status Optional This software is not supported with IP Office Release 7 0 systems It is provided only for the maintenance of older systems Requirements e O IP Office Administrator Applications DVD Alternatively the IP Office Administrator Applications suite can be downloaded from Avaya s support website http support avaya com e O Windows PC Requirements This should meet the requirements of the administrator applications being installed The specification below are the minimum requirements for IP Office Manager If other applications are to be installed on the PC then their individual requirements should also be met LLLINI M 4 s Processor 600MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD 800MHz Pentium or AMD Opteron AMD Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP Athlon64 AMD Athlon XP RAM 128MB 256MB HD Space 1GB 800MB for NET2 200MB for Manager 1 4GB
264. t Buttons The default button assignment depends on whether the system is a Key System or PBX System e PBX System e 01 03 ETR 01 02 Call Appearance Buttons The first three buttons two only on ETR phones are used call appearance buttons for making and answering calls They can be used for both internal and external calls This function is automatically assigned to the buttons by the system and cannot be overridden by the system administrator or extension user e Other Buttons Any additional buttons can be used for the functions listed in Button Programming Functions 145 These buttons can be programmed by the system administrator and for some functions the extension user e Key System e 01 02 Intercom Buttons The first two buttons are used as Intercom 1 and Intercom 2 buttons for internal calls This function is automatically assigned to the buttons by the system and cannot be overridden by the system administrator or extension user e 03 07 Line Buttons Buttons 03 and upwards up to the number of lines assigned to the extension are used as line appearance buttons for external calls These can only be programmed by a system administrator using the Number of Lines 48 and Line Assignment 714 functions They cannot be overridden by the extension user e Other Buttons Any additional buttons can be used for the functions listed in Button Programming Functions 145 These buttons can be programmed by the system administrator and for so
265. t Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 771 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Groupi 7 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e Unique Line Ringing Default 1 Software level 6 1 Selects the ring pattern that should be used for calls when alerting on an extension Calls forwarded sent to call coverage or to a hunt group will always use the line ring pattern Calls direct to an extension will use the line ringing pattern unless the user has Override Line Ringing set Not used for calls presented to the user as a member of the Operator group This feature is also not used for BST phones IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 106 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks DID Mapping Table This table is used to set the destination for incoming calls that include DID digits These are routed by matching the DID and ICLID information received with the call to an entry in the table This overrides the Coverage Destination settings of the channel on which the call was received Calls routin
266. t IP Office menu 161 selecting Cancel button 35 Change Directory 163 Directories 163 Preferences 161 Security 166 Validation 168 Visual 165 Visual Preferences 165 send 161 offline 169 Send Config 161 Send Config menu 161 Send Redirecting Number 99 Serial 161 Serial Communication Enable Port 161 Server SMTP 138 Service User 179 Services Base TCP 161 Services Base TCP Port hides 161 Set button 166 Setup IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition advanced system settings 138 Auto attendant 132 Auxiliary equipment 127 speed dial 57 system 48 user 61 setup exe 29 shows 161 AvayalP 181 Simultaneous Page 156 SIP trunks 111 SMDR 127 130 call times 187 enabling 187 examples 191 fields 188 records 187 ring time 188 SMTP server 138 Sorting List 172 Speed dialling 57 Station Lock 156 Station Unlock 156 Status Access 179 STUN settings 138 Sub Net mask 48 support microsoft com kb 256986 166 System Language 48 licence 59 operating 29 parameters 48 password 47 48 70 setup 48 system during upgrade 172 System Status 179 System Status Access 179 systems running 179 T TCP 161 164 change 161 set 33 TCP addresses 164 TCP Base Port 161 TCP Discovery Address Ranges 33 Technical Bulletins 172 TFTP Log 181 TFTP Log window 181 Those toolbars 181 TNS code 102 Transfer Return Extension 72 Trunk advanced setup analog 81 analog advanced 81 AT amp T 102 channel
267. t external number dialed e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e For analog telephone devices when using last number redial saved number redial system speed dial and personal speed dial features no dial tones for the digits dialed are played to the caller 4 24 Loudspeaker Page A button set to this function allows the user to make a page call to the extension configured as being connected to the loudspeaker equipment e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 70 4 25 Message Alert Notification For IP Office Release 7 0 a button set to this function allows a user to see the current state of other user s message waiting lamps It can only be used in conjunction with other users for which this user has Auto Dial Intercom 145 buttons configured e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 154 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Button Programming Night Service 4 26
268. t its default of CPE The setting CO is normally only used in lab back to back testing e Haul Length Default 0 115 feet Sets the line length to a specific distance e Channel Unit Default Foreign Exchange This field should be set to match the channel signaling equipment provided by the Central Office The options are Foreign Exchange Special Access or Normal Dial Plan The dial plan is used to apply number translations to the digits received by the line for output to the line provider and to indicate any special service required from the line provider for example to withhold the call ID The default dial plan is as shown below Explicitly not Anonymous Call Anonymously IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 100 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks 3 5 3 2 2 PRI Advanced Channel Setup This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks This menu allows the adjustment of settings for each channel of the PRI trunk Trunks PRI Advanced Channel Setup Trunk Number 5 Channel Parameters Channel Appearance ID RsGain TxGain Usi Delay Marti VMS Schedule VMS Auto Attendant OdB OdB OdB OdB OdB OdB OdB OdB n3 M Never Partner Auto Attendant 1 Partner Auto Attendant 1 Partner Auto Attendant 1 Partner Auto A
269. t the dialing prefix that indicates that the call is an external one for which an available line should be seized The Outbound Call Handling 125 settings are used to determine which lines are used for each outgoing call Line appearance buttons can also still be configured for making and answering external calls e Voicemail Mode Default Intuity Mode Software level 8 0 Embedded voicemail can use either IP Office Mode or Intuity Mode key presses for mailbox functions End users should be provided with the appropriate mailbox user guide for the mode selected Pre Release 8 0 systems use IP Office Mode only e Add Display VM Locales Software level Release 8 0 For new IP500 V2 SD cards and cards recreated using IP Office Manager the following Embedded Voicemail languages set are placed onto cards by default Using this option displays the list of languages that can be uploaded from IP Office Manager Those languages already present or not supported are greyed out If a locale is selected for the system a user a short code or an incoming call route which is not present on the SD card IP Office Manager will display an error This command can be used to upload the required language prompts to correct the error e IP Office A Law Norstar SD Cards UK English e IP Office U Law PARTNER SD Cards US English e Country This option sets a range of country specific telephony settings It also sets the default language shown in brackets u
270. ta Pickup Group number 1 to 4 A button set to this function allows the user to pickup the longest ringing call at the specified group e VMS Transfer 15 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to transfer a call directly into the voicemail mailbox of another user IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 68 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings User Setup Other Account Code Entry 14 Action Data None A button set to this feature allows the user to enter a voluntary account code to be associated with the current call or with the call made after entry of the account code Not supported by POTS phones Conference Drop 153 Action Data None A button set to this function acts as a call drop button On Avaya digital stations a list of conference parties is displayed from which the user can select which call to drop On ETR phones the last added external party is dropped Contact Closure 1 153 Contact Closure 2 153 Action Data None A button set to this function Allows the user to activate the phone system s contact closure 1 or contact closure 2 switch The user must also be a member of the appropriate Contact Closure Group 13h While the contact is on the button lamp is green at the user s extension and red at any other users configured for the same contact closure The duration and type of closure is configured in the Con
271. table below allows recording and playback of the matching auto attendant prompt It is important to remember that callers always hear two prompts a greeting prompt and then a menu prompt In addition that may also hear the emergency greeting first if it has been activated Auto Attendant Greeting Prompts 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 EL The Auto Attendant Access numbers allow internal access to an auto attendant Calls can be transferred to these numbers Morning Greeting Afternoon Greeting Evening Greeting Out of Hours Greeting Emergency Greeting Action Prompts Afternoon Menu Out of Hours Menu Auto Attendant Access IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 137 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 8 Advanced Parameters This menu cannot be accessed from the System 424 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting Advanced Advanced System Parameters eese Time Ring on Transfer Active v Hold Reminder Time 60 v Recall Timer Duration 500 F Transfer Return Ring 4 v Toll Call Prefix D or 1 Required Before Area Code w Outside Conference Denial Allowed v Pp O ULAW ALAW Default Name Priority Favour Trunk Gj STUN Settings for Network STUN Server Enable STUN Fi IP Address D 0 o o STUN Port leni ak Time 0 Run STUN Cancel Firewall NAT Type Unknown v
272. tact Closure Group settings Do Not Disturb 153 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to redirect all call to them while still being able to make calls Incoming calls follow voicemail coverage if on else they receive busy Do not disturb overrides call forwarding If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off Privacy 155 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to switch call privacy on or off during a call When on other users with line appearances for the same line are not able to join the call using that button If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off Recall 155 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to send a recall or hook flash signal Station Lock 156 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the user to lock their extension by entering a 4 digit code When locked the extension can only be used to make emergency calls and dial marked speed dials To unlock the phone the same 4 digit code must be used Station Unlock 156 Action Data None A button set to this function allows the system administrator extensions the first two extensions in the system to unlock any extension without knowing the 4 digit code that was used to lock the extension Blank When selected this option removes all programming from the button Coverage Call C
273. tension and the extensions in first calling group 71 e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 70 e This type of button can be used for one touch transfer 234 operation 4 32 Station Lock A button set to this function allows the user to lock their extension from being used to make calls After they press the button they are prompted to enter a four digit code after which the extension is locked If the extension is already locked pressing the button prompts for reentry of the four digit code to unlock the extension e Any locked extension can be unlocked from either of the first two extensions in the system without needing the four digit locking code using a Station Unlock 156 button e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button e On DS and ETR phones press FEATURE and then dial 21 e On BST phones press FEATURE and dial 936 4 33 Station Unlock This function can only be used by the first two extensions in the system A button set to this function allows the user to unlock any extension without needing to know the code
274. ternal number call 4 08 214 227 00200 03 5 392200 1 9416 200 0 1000073 0 T9005 Line 5 1 T79005 Line 5 2 0 0 0000 00 0000 00 0 0 8518 ICR Main ICR i Transferred Manually In this example the internal user transfers a call to an external number The External Targeting Cause in the first record indicates that this external call is the result of a user U transfer proposal XfP call The Continuation field indicates that another record with the same Call ID will be output The additional records are output after the transferred call is completed The first relates to the initial call prior The second is the transferred call with the External Targeting Cause now indicating user U transferred Xfd 16 33 19 00 00 05 3 13 0 9416 9416 0 1000044 1 E13 Extn13 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 U XfP Extnl7 4 16 33 09 00 00 02 2 17 0 13 13 1 1000043 0 E17 Extn17 E13 Extn13 11 0 v n 1 16 33 19 00 00 04 0 17 0 9416 9416 0 1000044 0 E17 Extn17 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 Extn17 U Xfd Extnl3 External Conference Party This is similar to internal conferencing see examples above but the conference setup and progress records include External Targeting Cause codes for user U conference proposal CfP and user U conferenced Cfd 16 48 58 00 00 02 2 13 0 9416 9416 0 1000066 1 E13 Extn13 T9005 Line 5 1 0 0 U C P Extn13 16 48 37 00 00 04 3 13 0 17 17 1 1000064 1 E13 Extn13 E17 Extn17 7 0 pp o sra r
275. their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 775 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e 76 Modem For Release 6 1 the option 76 Modem can be selected to route the call to the systems built in V32 modem 23 function This is intended for basic configuration access by system maintainers e Auto Attendant For Release 6 1 any of the configured voicemail auto attendants can be selected as the call destination IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 98 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 3 2 1 Details This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations Configuration Settings Trunks This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting Trunks This menu allows setting of advanced trunk settings that normally do not need to be changed The Channel Setup 10 option give access to a menu for configuring individual channels Trunks PRI Advanced Setup Channel Setu Trunk Parameters Switch Type Provider Test Number Clock Quality Framing CRC Checking Dial Plan Number Trunk Number 8
276. this specific case it is a text account code which can be selected and entered by the user using IP Office Phone Manager 2008 06 28 11 29 12 00 00 02 2 5002 1 1924 1924 Support 0 1000014169 0 E1924 Extn1924 T9620 LINE 8 20 0 0 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 191 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Conference Using Conference Button In this example an extension user answers a call and then brings in another user by using the Conference button on their phone Again we see records for the initial call the conference proposal call and then for the 3 parties in the conference that is created 2008 07 09 15 05 41 00 00 04 3 13 0 11 11 1 1000009 1 E13 Extn13 E11 Extn11 0 0 2008 07 09 15 05 26 00 00 09 3 17 0 13 13 1 1000008 1 E17 Extn17 E13 Extn13 10 0 2008 07 09 15 05 41 00 00 08 0 0 1 1000009 0 E11 Extnll V11001 CO Channel 100 1 0 0 2008 07 09 15 05 50 00 00 10 0 13 0 11 11 1 1000010 0 E13 Extn13 V11002 CO Channel 100 2 0 0 2008 07 09 15 05 26 00 00 10 0 17 0 13 13 1 1000008 0 E17 Extn17 V11003 CO Channel 100 3 0 0 Adding a Party to a Conference This example is a variant on that above Having started a conference extension 13 adds another party 2008 07 09 15 08 31 00 00 03 3 13 0 11 11 1 1000014 1 E13 Extn13 E11 Extn11 0 0 2008 07 09 15 08 02 00 00 22 6 17 0 13 13 1 1000013 1 E17 Extn17 E13 Extn13 9 0 2008 07 09 15 08 45 00 00 02 4 13 0 403 13 0 1000016 1 E13
277. tination for matching calls The options differ depending on whether the system s System Mode 484 is set to Key System or PBX System e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with their System Mode 48 gt set to PBX System incoming calls can be routed to one of the 4 collective calling groups 775 e Operator Group For systems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e 76 Modem For Release 6 1 the option 76 Modem can be selected to route the call to the systems built in V32 modem 23 function This is intended for basic configuration access by system maintainers e Auto Attendant For Release 6 1 any of the configured voicemail auto attendants can be selected as the call destination IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 89 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 2 1 BRI Advanced Setup This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed
278. to attendant e Auto Attendant This drop down list is used to select which auto attendant is being configured For Release 6 1 up to 9 auto attendants are supported e The Add button can be used to create a new auto attendant Up to 9 auto attendants are supported e The Delete button removes the currently selected auto attendant It does not erase any greetings that have been recorded for the auto attendant The first auto attendant cannot be removed e Maximum Inactivity Defau t 8 seconds Range 1 to 20 seconds This field sets how long after playing the prompts the auto attendant should wait for a valid key press If exceeded the caller is transferred to the operator the first extension in the system e Menu Prompt Defau t Each menu uses own prompt Software level 6 1 Each time profile option used by an auto attendant can have its own set of actions and therefore may require a separate actions prompt to be played after the appropriate greeting prompt The settings Each menu uses own prompt does that Alternately one of the menu options can be selected as the menu option prompt played at all times of day e Direct Dial By Number Default On for the first default auto attendant Off for other auto attendants This setting affects the operation of any key presses in the auto attendant menu set to use the Dial By Number action e If selected the key press for the action is included in any following digits dialed by the caller
279. tober 15 2012 SMTP Server Configuration Email can be used to provide users with an alert when they have a new voicemail message This requires the system to be configured with details of an SMTP email server account which is used to forward the messages to the user s email address The user email addresses are set through the user s Advanced Settings 72 e IP Address Default 0 0 0 0 This field sets the IP address of the SMTP server being used to forward emails e Port Default 25 Range 0 to 65534 This field sets the destination port on the SMTP server e Email From Address Default Blank This field sets the sender address to be used with mailed alarms Depending of the authentication requirements of the SMTP server this may need to be a valid email address hosted by that server Otherwise the SMTP email server may need to be configured to support SMTP relay e Server Requires Authentication Default On This field should be selected if the SMTP server being used requires authentication to allow the sending of emails When selected the User Name and Password fields become available e User Name Default Blank This field sets the user name to be used for SMTP server authentication e Password Default Blank This field sets the password to be used for SMTP server authentication e Use Challenge Response Authentication Default Off This field should be selected if the SMTP uses CRAM MD5 Busy Tone Detection The u
280. ttendant 1 Partner Auto Attendant 1 Partner Auto Attendant 1 Partner Auto Attendant 1 did e i Mm MM NM NM Mm NIIN Mm M Mm r2 Mm NIN Partner Auto Attendant 1 Channel Parameters e Channel For information only not editable Not that this indicates the maximum number of channels not the number of licensed channels usable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned This number is used to uniquely identify the telephone line or channel The number can be assigned to programmable buttons on extensions to allow the users to make and answer calls on that line or channel e Tx Gain Default 0dB The transmit gain in dB e Rx Gain Default 0dB The receive gain in dB e VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant when the system is not running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Days Only e VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant when the system is running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Night Only e VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when the VMS Delay settings above should be used and unanswered calls redirected to an auto attendant The options are e Always Redirect calls when the system is in both day and night s
281. tton set to this feature dials the stored number using the first available line appearance in the user s automatic line selection 655 setting Auto Dial ICM 148 Action Data User extension number A button set to this function can be used to make an intercom call to the configured extension It will also indicate when that user is idle or active Auto Dial ICM Page l14 Action Data User extension number A button set to this function can be used to page the configured extension Group Calling Page 150 Action Data Calling group 1 to 4 A button set to this function can be used to make a page call to the available members of the configured calling group 77 gt Group Calling Ring 150 Action Data Calling group 1 to 4 A button set to this function can be used to make a call to the available members of the configured calling group Group Hunting Page 154 Action Data Hunt group 1 to 6 A button set to this function can be used to make a page call to the available members of the configured hunt group 77 gt Group Hunting Ring 154 Action Data Hunt group 1 to 6 A button set to this function can be used to make a call to the available members of the configured hunt group Last Number Redial 154 Action Data None A button set to this function redials the last outgoing external number dialed by the user Loudspeaker Paging 15 Action Data None A button set to this functions makes a page call
282. uage used by Manager when running Click Next gt 5 Select who should be able to run the Admin Suite applications Click Next gt 6 If required select the destination to which the applications should be installed We recommend that you accept the default destination Click Next 7 The next screen is used to select which applications in the suite should be installed Clicking on each will display a description of the application Click on the next to each application to change the installation selection When you have selected the installations required click Next La IP Office Admin Suite InstallShield Wizard Custom Setup Select the program features you want installed Click on an icon in the list below to change how a Feature is installed Feature Description Provides a system view of all active calls amp 3 System Monitor amp 3 Feature Key Server C3 This feature will be installed on local hard drive Bon 38 This feature and all subfeatures will be installed on local hard drive EJ This feature will be installed when required Install X Thisfeature will not be available CUPro Installshield Help 8 Ensure that at minimum System Monitor and Manager are selected Click Next gt 9 Click Install 10 Installation of Windows Net2 components may be required If menus for this appear follow the prompts to install Net 11 If
283. ually or the phone system can attempt to automatically discover the appropriate values To complete the fields automatically only the STUN Server IP Address is required STUN operation is then tested by clicking Run STUN If successful the remaining fields are filled with the results e Enable STUN Default Off This field is used to select whether STUN is used or not e STUN Server IP Address Default Blank This is the IP address of the line providers SIP STUN server The phone system will send basic SIP messages to this destination and from data inserted into the replies can try to determine the type ITSP NAT changes being applied by any firewall between it and the ITSP e STUN Port Default 3478 Defines the port to which STUN requests are sent if STUN is used e Firewall NAT Type Default Unknown The settings here reflect different types of network firewalls e Blocking Firewall Allow outgoing TFTP WRQ Typically this will be the case It has been observed that the Avaya corporate firewall permits outgoing TFTP RRQ e Symmetric Firewall SIP packets are unchanged but ports need to be opened and kept open with keep alives If this type of NAT is detected or manually selected a warning Communication is not possible unless the STUN server is supported on same IP address as the ITSP will be displayed as part of the manager validation e Open Internet No action required If this mode is selected STUN lookups are not performed e
284. umber of Lines Line Assignment Assign Line to AA Co Disconnect Time Auto Line Selection Contact Close Grp fe o 5 et S o er o o a 2 ao Doorphone 1 Extension Doorphone 2 Extension Doorphone Alert Ext Internal Hotline Ext Loudspeaker Paging Ext Fax Machine Extension EEEE TE eee TPP FTT gt o s o a r E Zj IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager IP Office Basic Edition Page 208 Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Other System Administration Tools Phone Based Administration Category Setting Speed Dials Personal Speed Dial Extension Settings System Administration System Administration PH HR e AJAS re OoOloio a NIGCIn i System Administration Co r O Ko Centralized Programming Telephone Programming Centralized Programming System Administration Centralized Programming Button Programming Centralized Programming Display Language System Administration System Administration Intercom Dial Tone System Administration External Hotline stem Administration System Administration HH PH PH PH D wlhelwlwlwl w wl ololieljoli slio olo oOlol ejvlol co BIg Oo System Administration N o e M n Ko Do Not Disturb Exceptions Centralized Programming Telephone Programming System Administration Remote Call Forward System Administration Account Codes Forced Account Code System Administration Forced Account Code List System Ad
285. umber of channels depends on the Line Subtype For a PRI trunk 23 channels are supported for a T1 trunk 24 channels are supported e Advanced Setup This is used to access features that should only be adjusted to match the requirements of the line provider PRI Trunk Channel Setup e Admin Default Out of Service Options are In Service DID Only Maintenance and Out of Service e Channel For information only not editable Not that this indicates the maximum number of channels not the number of licensed channels usable e Appearance ID Default Auto assigned This number is used to uniquely identify the telephone line or channel The number can be assigned to programmable buttons on extensions to allow the users to make and answer calls on that line or channel e Local Number Information only Use to any associated number for test calls to the line e Anonymous Default Off If selected withhold sending caller ID information on outgoing calls e Coverage Destination Default None System Mode Key System This option sets where incoming calls should alert in addition to alerting on those extension that have a line appearance button programmed for the line When the phone system is in night service mode calls alert at the members of the Night Service 77 group e None If set to None incoming calls will only alert on user extensions with line appearance buttons that match the line s Appearance ID e Extension Route incoming
286. up Ring All This option is only available for systems with their System Mode set to PBX System By default the group contains the first extension on the system and is used as the default destination for DID calls It can also be selected as the destination for incoming SIP calls For PRI and Ring All When the phone system is set to night service mode incoming external calls other than those routed by DDI are rerouted to the users in the Operator Group BRI trunks it is fixed incoming destination for calls unless DID Mapping is applied to the call Calling Groups 4 Ring All Users can call or transfer calls to a calling group Four calling groups can be configured Calling Group 1 is used by the Simultaneous Page function IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 77 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 78 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Group Management Hunt Groups Configured The groups available on a system are not adjustable This list is used to display the groups available and select which group is currently editable in the table below e Name Information only not editable e Number Information only not editable e Ring Mode Information only not editable The ring mode of a group sets the order in which members of the group are used e Sequential The available
287. uration menu click OK 6 The user name and password will be requested Enter Administrator and the old password IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 47 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 2 System Settings This menu is accessed from the System 424 page by selecting Change System Settings This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 434 list by selecting System This window displays a summary of the hardware components installed in the phone system It also enables configuration of system specific settings Installed Hardware Number Type Name Control Unit IP 500 V2 w2 Internal TCM8 4 Internal COMBO6210 4TM4 System Parameters System Name System B Add Display VM locales System Made PBX System a Customize Locale Settings Tone Plan Tone Plan 1 v Voicemail Mode IP Office Mode v CLI Type FSKV23 v Country Customize iwi YP CI Busy Tone Detection Language English UK Receive IP Address Via DHCP Server oO IP Address LAN1 192 168 0 212 Sub Net Mask LAN1 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 1 Automatic Daylight Saving Time o Outside Line None v System Password Log All Caller ID Calls for Users None w None w None v Fi Unsupervised nalog Trunk Disconnect Handling Installed Hardware This section displays a list of the hardware compo
288. uration settings open within Manager can be sent to the IP Office system 1 The first steps of this process depend on whether you are sending a configuration received from the IP Office system or sending one opened offline created new e A Configuration Opened from an IP Office Click al in the main toolbar or select File Save Configuration from the menu bar e A Configuration Created Offline or Opened from a PC File Select File Offline Send Config from the menu bar 2 The Send Configuration menu is displayed ES Send Configuration IP Office Settings IP500v2 Configuration Reboot Mode Merge Immediate O When Free Timed Reboot Time 14 31 13 4 Call Barring C Incoming Calls C Outgoing Calls e Configuration Reboot Mode If Manager thinks the changes made to the configuration settings are mergeable it will select Merge by default otherwise it will select Immediate e Merge Send the configuration settings without rebooting the IP Office This option is selected by default if the changes made since the configuration was loaded into Manager as mergeable do not select this option otherwise e Immediate Send the configuration and then reboot the IP Office e When Free Send the configuration and reboot the IP Office when there are no calls in progress This mode can be combined with the Call Barring options e Timed The same as When Free but waits for a specific time after which it then wait
289. ure 2 sseseee 153 4 19 Do Not Disturb sssseenen 153 4 20 Hot Dlal 2 HER Ibi mei 154 4 21 Hunt Group er eie t orte tein 154 4 22 Idle Line Pickup ssseseseeeeeeeee 154 4 23 Last Number Redial 154 4 24 Loudspeaker Page sse 154 4 25 Message Alert Notification sseseesssss 154 4 26 Night Service 2 eee ette brat eel 155 4 27 Pickup GFOUp iioii pectori to tec CL epo fpecies 155 4 28 Privacy eit ha fette tein 155 4 29 Recall nme edet erede e 155 4 30 Saved Number Redial seseessss 156 4 31 Simultaneous Page 156 4 32 Station Lock cene 156 4 33 Station Unlock ssssssssseeeeeees 156 4 94 VMS Cover si sates sitire tate ede decet 156 4 35 Voice Mailbox Transfer sesssssssss 157 4 36 Wake Up Service seeeee 158 5 Manager Menu Commands 5 1 File Mens niece bte oe esee teet 161 5 1 1 Open Configuration 161 5 1 2 Close Configuration eeesssss 161 5 1 3 Save Configuration 161 5 1 4 Save Configuration As esses 161 5 1 5 Preferences ste eee ect e nee 161 5 1 6 Offllirie ves inre De et ee 169 5 1 7 AdVariced iint ertet 170 5 4 8 EXIE rrr deed Pare Paese Eee een 180 5 2 VIEW secrete geheime ec eie 181 5 24 Toolbars eerte 181 5 2 2 TOOl TID d Utm erre eta 1
290. urs e If you have a voice messaging system VMS Hunt Schedule determines when outside calls should ring voicemail The status of the Night Service Button tells the voice messaging system to operate in day or night mode e The Night Service Button returns to the status on off it was in immediately prior to a power failure or to a system reset 170 being used e Night Service is unavailable on T1 lines with Direct Inward Dialing DID 4 27 Pickup Group A button set to this function allows the user to answer a call being presented to any extension that is a member of the pickup group configured for the button e If an extension already has a button set to this function and target creating another button with this function to the same target will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e To access this function without a programmable button press an intercom or call appearance button and dial 661 to 664 for the group 1 to 4 from which to pickup the call e When there are multiple calls ringing the members of a pickup group the longest ringing call is picked up 4 28 Privacy A button set to this function allows the user to turn privacy on or off When on other extensions are not able to bridge into the user s calls e If an extension already has a button set to this function creating another button with this function will automatically clear the setting from the existing button e This function does not re
291. used for the discovery process Individual addresses can be entered separated by semi colons for example 135 164 180 170 135 164 180 175 Address ranges can be specified using dashes for example 135 64 180 170 135 64 180 175 e UDP Discovery Default On This settings controls whether Manager uses UDP to discover IP Office systems Pre 3 2 IP Office systems only respond to UDP discovery By default IP Office 3 2 and higher systems also respond to UDP discovery but that can be disabled through the IP Office system s security settings e Enter Broadcast IP Address Default 255 255 255 255 The broadcast IP address range that Manager should used during UDP discovery Since UDP broadcast is not routable it will not locate IP Office systems that are on different subnets from the Manager PC unless a specific address is entered e Use DNS Software level IP Office Manager 6 2 Selecting this option allows IP Office Manager to use DNS name or IP address lookup to locate an IP Office system Note that this overrides the use of the TCP Discovery and UDP Discovery options above This option requires the IP Office IP address to be assigned as a name on the users DNS server When selected the Unit Discovery Address field on the Select IP Office menu is replaced by a Enter Unit DNS Name or IP Address field e SCN Discovery If enabled when discovering IP Office systems the list of discovered systems will group IP Offices in the same Small Communit
292. used to attempt to remove that interference The options are Off 50Hz or 60Hz Voice Echo Cancellation Default 16ms Allows settings of Off 8 16 32 64 and 128 milliseconds The echo cancellation should only be adjusted as high as required to remove echo problems Setting it to a higher value than necessary can cause other distortions Echo Reduction Default On ATM4Uv2 card only Used when impedance matching is not required but echo reduction is Options are On or Off Gains These settings should not be adjusted without guidance from the line provider A gt D Default OdB Range 10 0dB to 6 0dB in 0 5dB steps Sets the analog to digital gain D gt A Default 0dB Range Sets the digital to analog gain 10 0dB to 6 0dB in 0 5dB steps DTMF DTMF Mark Default 80 80ms Range 0 to 255 Interval when DTMF signal is kept active during transmission of DTMF signals DTMF Space Default 80 80ms Range 0 to 255 Interval of silence between DTMF signal transmissions VMS Settings VMS Delay Day Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Set the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant when the system is not running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Days Only VMS Delay Night Default 2 Range 0 to 6 number of rings Sets the number of rings before an unanswered call should be redirected to an auto attendant
293. uto Attendant Service The VMS Schedule setting of each line can be used to set whether unanswered calls should go to a selected auto attendant The settings can be enabled for day service night service 214 both or never the default The delay used before going to the auto attendant is set by the line s VMS Delay Day and VMS Delay Night settings as appropriate IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 20 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Telephony Features Voicemail Operation 1 6 Night Service Use this feature to program a button on the first extension on the system to turn night service on and off When night service is on all lines assigned to the telephones of the users in the night service group 77 ring immediately regardless of their normal line ringing settings Night service is useful if you want phones to ring after regular business hours For example although Shipping Department workers do not answer calls directly during the day you want them to answer incoming calls after hours e You must program a Night Service Button on the first extension on the system e This function is only supported on a button that includes LED LCD indicator The indicator is lit when the function is enabled e If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off e Dialing restrictions for extensions not in the Night Service Group remain the same as during no
294. utomatically clear the setting from the existing button If the user has this feature enabled removing this button will turn the feature off For analog lines and T1 lines without DID the extension must be the Line Coverage Extension for that line You can forward outside intercom transferred and voice signaled calls You cannot forward group calls calls to doorphone alert extensions coverage calls transfer return calls and night service calls The system will only forward calls on lines that have reliable disconnect For these lines Hold Disconnect Time must be set to a value other than 00 No Detection The extension must have an available line to forward the call to an outside number The system uses the extension s automatic line selection 654 setting to determine which line to use for the outgoing call Extension s with Remote Call Forwarding enabled can also forward calls externally by specifying a personal speed dial 80 to 99 as the destination You can also access this option by pressing FEATURE 11 and entering the destination number To switch forwarding off enter the extension s own number as the destination Programming the destination and or the originator onto the call coverage button is optional Extensions configured as doorphone extension or loudspeaker device will ignore any forwarding set on the extension Do not disturb overrides call forwarding To access this function without a programmable button e
295. vel of the control unit and expansion modules within IP Office systems against the software level of the bin binary files Manager has available The Upgrade Wizard can then be used to select which units to upgrade Ay WARNING Incorrect use of the upgrade command can halt IP Office operation and render units in the system unusable You must refer to the IP Office Technical Bulletins for a specific release for full details of performing software upgrades to that release For example e When upgrading a system from a pre 8 0 release the systems security settings should first be defaulted This allows the security settings to then be altered during the upgrade to support IP Office Web Manager e Performing any other actions on a system during an upgrade or closing the upgrade wizard and Manager during an upgrade may render systems unusable e During an upgrade the IP Office system may restrict calls and services It will reboot and disconnect all current calls and services Avaya IP Office R6 1 UpgradeWiz C Program FilesMvayaMP Office Manager Name IP Address Type Version Mode Licensed Required Licence Available Status Progress System A System A 192 168 0 210 IP 500 v2 7 0 11007 IP Office 7 0 11007 avpotsi6 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 dvppots bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 nas0 16 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 nadcp 16 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007 nadep 2 bin 9 0 11007 IP Office 9 0 11007
296. when the system is running in night service mode and the VMS Schedule is set to Always or Night Only VMS Schedule Default Never This option determines when the VMS Delay settings above should be used and unanswered calls redirected to an auto attendant The options are e Always Redirect calls when the system is in both day and night service 21 modes e Day Only Redirect calls only when the system is not in night service IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 84 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks e Night Only Redirect calls only when the system is in night service e Never Do not redirect calls e VMS Auto Attendant Default Auto Attendant 1 Software Level 6 1 This field allows selection of which auto attendant is used by this line IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 85 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 1 2 Analog Trunk Templates IP Office Manager can be used to import trunk settings from a template If you have multiple system using the same provider this may simplify configuration and maintenance of the systems e This functionality is not enabled by default It is controlled by the Enable Template Options setting in the Manager application preferences 16 e Trunk templates are used by different types of IP Office system Those template settings not supported by an IP
297. which serial port Manager should use e Auto Connect on start up Default On If on when Manager is started it will automatically launch the Select IP Office menu and display any discover IP Offices If only one IP Office is discover Manager will automatically attempt to login using the default name and password and if this fails display the login request for that IP Office instead e Set Simplified View as Default Default On If on the Manager will start in simplified view 405 if no configuration is loaded e Default to Standard mode Default Off If on when a configuration for a new or defaulted system running in IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode mode is loaded Manager will automatically convert the configuration to IP Office Essential Edition Sending the configuration back to the system will restart it in IP Office Essential Edition Only select this option if the only systems you expect to install are IP Office Essential Edition systems e This setting does not affect existing systems with non default configurations IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 162 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 1 5 2 Directories This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Directories sub tab These fields set the default location where Manager will look for and save files This tab is also accessed by the File Change Working Directory
298. which the user is a member e No Restrictions The user can make outgoing external calls The Allowed Lists and Disallowed Lists of which the user is a member still apply e Inside only The user can only make internal calls e Local only The user can only make outgoing external calls to numbers matching local numbers IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 75 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 3 3 DND Exception List This menu cannot be accessed from the System 42 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 4235 list by selecting User Setup Advanced Settings For Release 7 0 IP Office Manager can be used to see and edit users do not disturb settings Users themselves can switch do not disturb on off using a programmed key 66 on their phone or an option in their phone s menus Do not disturb prevents the user from receiving hunt group and page calls Direct callers hear busy tone or are diverted to voicemail if available It overrides any call forwarding follow me and call coverage settings A set of exception numbers can be added to list numbers from which the user still wants to be able to receive calls when they have do not disturb enabled Select User 10 bd C Do Not Disturb Telephone Number e Select User Select the user whose current do not disturb settings are displayed e Do Not Disturb Default Off When checked the user s extension is co
299. with the call to an entry in the table This overrides the Coverage Destination settings of the channel on which the call was received Calls routing by DID mapping are not affected by the phone system being put into night service If the system is in Key system mode and no match is found the call is routed to the first extension in the system If the system is in PBX mode and no match is found the call is routed to the Operator group The table is applied to all channels e DID Number If the incoming DID of a call on the trunk matches the DID set here it will be routed to this destination The system supports up to 4 digits DID additional digits after the first 4 are ignored Leave blank if only CLI matching is required e Incoming CLI If the incoming caller number on the trunk matches the Incoming CLI set here it will be routed to this destination Leave blank if only DID matching is required e Destination When this field is selected the drop down list allows selection of the destination for matching calls The options differ depending on whether the system s System Mode 484 is set to Key System or PBX System e Extension Route incoming calls to a particular extension e Phantom Extension IP Office Release 6 1 supports phantom extensions 224 One of these can be selected as the destination for calls e Hunt Group Incoming calls can be routed to one of the 6 sequential hunt groups 774 e Calling Group For systems with
300. wn wn wn wn wn wn wn uU 2 wn 2 wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn wn atlaorlaoalalaelaelalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalalal la Oo O O OlOlo o0 o a 0 a ijoja ioli ioli iolon SIS IS I3 13 3 13 3 3725 13 5 3 3 313 1373 1 313 1313 13 13 373 73173 1373 7373 13 i i i i i i i i iBRi iRI i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i Q7 OO QOSQAaAaASaASsay_ AsaygaAsayaqayjqjaqa sjaqyaqyjasjaqyayjaqayajajayajayjyasjaqayayaqasaqa s a 3 23 3 2313 23 32 23 2 3 213 13 2313 3132 31 23 3 3 213231313313 233 3 3 3 1 23 13 1213123 12310123210 123 12 13 12 13 12 12123 13 12 12 2 1212 12123 13123 12312123 Uu Uu Uu Uu wn Uu Uu n v 1a Yn ia Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu n Uu Uu Uu Uu Uu ul Uu Uu n Uu Uu Uu n n Uu thloalaoalalalaljalslalalsa lala lalalalalaljalaelalalalalaljalalaljalalalalala Dia lala lala lola lal l a 2 lala lala lo lad la lo lola lo lo lad lo lo od od o o ejoeojejejoeo je je jeje 3 le s53 is s sjs s je se jse eo eo e9s so es es eo o Jo 9 Jo o 23 251 251 251 25 251 251 25 51 2 1 251 21 251251 251 251 251 251 251 251 251 251 251251 251251 251 251 251251 25 1 o 23 23 a a Wake up Service Button Log Caller ID Extensions Network Time Synch Line Coverage Extension Line Ringing Pattern Unique Line Ringing 612 613 604 605 606 603 617 601 407 ARS Selectors Outgoing Call Prefix Automatic Daylight Saving System Date System Time N
301. y Network and allow them to be loaded as a single configuration IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode systems are not supported in a Small Community Network IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 164 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 1 5 4 Visual Preferences This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Visual Preferences sub tab Preferences Directories Discovery Visual Preferences Security Validation Icon Medium v Size Multiline Tabs C Enable Template Options e Icon size Sets the size for the icons in the navigation pane between Small Medium or Large e Multiline Tabs Default Off In the details pane for entry types with more than two tabs Manager can either use buttons to scroll the tabs horizontally or arrange the tabs into multiple rows This setting allows selection of which method Manager uses e Enable Template Options Default Off If enabled the functions to import SIP trunk templates 12 and analog trunk templates are enabled IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 165 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 5 1 5 5 Security This tab is accessed through File Preferences and then selecting the Security sub tab Controls the various security settings of Manager Security F Request Login on Save C Close Configuration Secu
302. y process for selection of the IP Office system IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 178 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Manager Menu Commands File Menu 5 1 7 10 System Status IP Office System Status is an application that can be used to monitor and report on the status of an IP Office system loxi AVAYA IP Office System Status Help Snapshot LogOff Exit About Stats On rue Alarms for Line 5 Slot B Port 1 ervice 2 BT EK 24 Hour Performance History ai aLine 5 3 Link 1 Error Description 26 July 2006 14 03 48 LIE 26 July 2006 14 03 48 1 Glear Clear All Print Save As System Status is included on the Avaya System SD memory card and can be start by browsing to the IP address of the system and selecting the System Status link 5 1 7 11 Add Display VM Locales This option is not shown for off line configuration or configurations loaded from a PC file Selecting this option displays a list of the Embedded Voicemail prompt languages Those languages already present on the System SD card or not supported are greyed out Additional languages can be selected and then uploaded from IP Office Manager to the system When editing the system configuration in IP Office Manager if the locale language selected for the system a user a short code or an incoming call route is not already present on the System SD card IP Office Manager will display an e
303. ype Selection Locale Country United States Service Provider SIP1 v C Display All Create new SIP Trunk 5 Select Create New SIP Trunk 3 5 5 Outbound Call Handling This menu cannot be accessed from the System 424 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 43 list by selecting Trunks Outbound Call Handling This menu is used by systems with their System Mode set to PBX System For more details refer to Key System or PBX System 114 It is used to determine which line should be used to route an outgoing call when the user dials a number beginning with the system s Outside Line 4 prefix IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 122 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 Configuration Settings Trunks The call routing is done in two parts e The ARS Selectors 124 table is used to create groups of lines each group with an ARS Selector number The same line can be in more than one group e The Dial Numbers 126 table is used to match the number dialed by a user to a required ARS Select group number When a match is found an available line in that ARS Select group is seized for the call IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 123 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 5 1 ARS Selectors This menu cannot be accessed from the System 424 page This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by
304. ystems with their System Mode 485 set to PBX System incoming calls are routed to the Operator Group 775 e Voicemail Route incoming calls to the systems voicemail to collect messages This requires the caller to know the mailbox number and passcode e 76 Modem For Release 6 1 the option 76 Modem can be selected to route the call to the systems built in V32 modem 23 function This is intended for basic configuration access by system maintainers e Auto Attendant For Release 6 1 any of the configured voicemail auto attendants can be selected as the call destination IP Office Basic Edition Quick Mode 8 1 FP1 Manager Page 107 IP Office Basic Edition Issue 05g Monday October 15 2012 3 5 3 3 1 T1 Advanced Setup This menu is accessed from the System 42 page by selecting Update Trunk Configurations This menu is accessed from the Admin Tasks 435 list by selecting Trunks This menu allows setting of advanced T1 trunk settings that normally do not need to be changed The Channel Setup 109 option give access to a menu for configuring individual channels Trunks T1 Advanced Setup Channel Setup Trunk Parameters Clock Quality Framing CRE Checking Trunk Number 9 Network ESF v Line Signalling Haul Length Zero Suppression BgZS Trunk Parameters Clock Quality Default Network v Channel Unit Leave as Network unless advised otherwise by Avaya Fr

IP Office Basic Edition

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents